Omron Home Theater Server C200HW ZW3AT2 E V2 User Manual

Cat.No. W369–E1–1  
SYSMAC  
C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2  
Controller Link Support Software  
Ver. 2.00  
OPERATION MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSMAC  
C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2  
Controller Link Support Software  
Ver. 2.00  
Operation Manual  
Revised March 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice:  
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator  
and only for the purposes described in this manual.  
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed  
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-  
age to property.  
DANGER  
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or  
serious injury.  
!
!
!
WARNING  
Caution  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or  
serious injury.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or  
moderate injury, or property damage.  
OMRON Product References  
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word Unitis also capitalized when it refers  
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.  
The abbreviation Ch,which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means  
wordand is abbreviated Wdin documentation in this sense.  
The abbreviation PCmeans Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-  
thing else.  
Visual Aids  
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of  
information.  
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation  
of the product.  
1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.  
OMRON, 2000  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any  
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-  
sion of OMRON.  
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is  
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change  
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no  
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-  
tion contained in this publication.  
DOS, Windows and Microsoft C are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.  
All other product names or company names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of each  
respective company.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xi  
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6 Checking the Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xii  
xii  
xii  
xii  
xiii  
xiii  
SECTION 1  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
1-1 About the Controller Link Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2 Checking Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4 Overall Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-5 Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2
7
7
9
10  
SECTION 2  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
11  
2-1 Preparations for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
12  
13  
SECTION 3  
Basic Operations and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
15  
3-1 Starting and Exiting the Controller Link Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2 Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3 Connecting to a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
16  
19  
23  
SECTION 4  
Basic Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
37  
4-1 Starting the Network for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2 Starting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3 Interconnecting Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
38  
38  
39  
SECTION 5  
Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
41  
5-1 Keyboard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3 L: Data Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-4 P: Set Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5 R: Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-6 N: Echoback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-7 D: Broadcast Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-8 C: Monitor Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9 E: Display Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-10 S: Display Node Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-11 M: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-12 K: Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13 W: Edit PC ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14 I: System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-15 Q: Exit to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
43  
43  
45  
83  
85  
100  
101  
103  
104  
109  
112  
115  
124  
135  
142  
SECTION 6  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Appendices  
A Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C Registering the Controller Link Support Software in the SYSMAC Support Software . . . . .  
D Running the Controller Link Support Software under Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
E Editing the Device Information Setting File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
145  
149  
163  
165  
167  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Manual:  
This manual describes the installation and operation of the C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller Link Sup-  
port Software (Ver. 2.00) and includes the sections described below. The Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware is used to set up and manage a Controller Link Network (Wired type, Optical type, Optical Ring type).  
The C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 is for use on a computer that is not part of the Controller Link Network (i.e., a  
computer connected to the Network via a PC, not as a Network node).  
The following three manuals are directly related to application of the Controller Link Network.  
Name  
Contents  
Cat. No.  
(suffixes omitted)  
SYSMAC C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2, Controller  
Link Support Software  
Operation Manual (this manual)  
Installation and operating procedures for the Controller Link  
Support Software Ver 2.00. The Controller Link Support Software  
enables manual setting of data links and other procedures for a  
Controller Link Network. Use this software for Optical Controller  
Link Networks.  
W308  
SYSMAC 3G8F5-CLK11-E, 3G8F5-CLK21-E  
Controller Link Support Boards  
Operation Manual  
Installation, setup, and operating procedures for Controller Link  
Support Boards. Controller Link Support Boards are used to  
connect IBM PC/ATs or compatibles to a Controller Link Network.  
W307  
SYSMAC CS1W-CLK11/21, C200HW-CLK21, Installation, setup, and operating procedures for the Controller Link W309  
CVM1-CLK21, CQM1H-CLK2 Controller Link  
Units  
Operation Manual  
Units. Controller Link Units are used to connect CS1-series,  
CV-series, CVM1, C200HX/HG/HE, and CQM1H PCs to a  
Controller Link Network.  
SYSMAC CS1W-CLK12, CVM1-CLK12  
Optical Ring Controller Link Units  
Operation Manual  
Installation, setup, and operating procedures for Optical Ring  
Controller Link Units. Optical Ring Controller Link Units are used  
to connect CS1-series, CV-series, and CVM1 PCs to an Optical  
Ring Controller Link Network.  
W370  
W308  
SYSMAC C200HW-ZW3AT2-E,  
3G8F5-CLK11-E/CLK21-E  
Controller Link Support Software  
Operation Manual  
Installation and operating procedures for the Controller Link  
Support Software Ver. 1.10 (or earlier versions). This manual is  
included with Controller Link Support Boards. Use Controller Link  
Support Software Ver. 1.10 (or earlier versions) with Controller  
Link Support Boards.  
Please read this manual and related manuals carefully and be sure you understand the information pro-  
vided before attempting to use the Controller Link Support Software.  
Precautions provides general precautions for using the Controller Link Support Software.  
Section 1 explains the features of the Controller Link Support Software and its operating environment.  
Section 2 describes how to install the C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller Link Support Software. Refer to the Controller Link  
Support Boards Operation Manual (W307) for installation procedures for the 3G8F5-CLKj1-E Controller Link Support Software.  
Section 3 describes the Controller Link Support Software menu structure and basic operations, such as starting and exiting the  
software. It also describes how to connect the computer running the Controller Link Support Software to the Network.  
Section 4 outlines operating procedures for the Controller Link Support Software. Actual procedures are provided in Section 5  
Operating Procedures.  
Section 5 describes individual operating procedures for the Controller Link Support Software.  
Section 6describes troubleshooting methods for some of the problems that can occur with the Controller Link Support Software.  
Appendix A provides a list of error messages displayed by the Controller Link Support Software.  
Appendix B describes how to connect a remote computer running the Controller Link Support Software to a PC on a Controller  
Link Network via modem.  
Appendix C tells how to register the Controller Link Support Software on the Option Menu of the SYSMAC Support Software.  
Appendix D tells how to run the Controller Link Support Software under Windows 95.  
Appendix E tells how to edit the device information setting file.  
Appendix F provides forms that can be used to help structure data links.  
!
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in  
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each  
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section  
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
This section provides general precautions for using the Controller Link Support Software.  
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the product. You must  
read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate the Controller Link  
Support Software.  
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6 Checking the Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xii  
xii  
xii  
xii  
xiii  
xiii  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
4
1
Intended Audience  
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-  
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).  
Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.  
Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.  
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.  
2
General Precautions  
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications  
described in the operation manuals.  
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual  
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation  
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement ma-  
chines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that  
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult  
your OMRON representative.  
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are  
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the  
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.  
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be  
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual  
close at hand for reference during operation.  
WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified  
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can  
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON  
representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned  
applications.  
!
3
Safety Precautions  
WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble the Board or touch the inside of the Unit while the  
!
!
!
!
power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.  
WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being  
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.  
WARNING Be sure to turn OFF the power supply before assembling the Unit or connecting  
cables. Not doing so may result in electric shock.  
WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so  
may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.  
4
Application Precautions  
Observe the following precautions when using the PC System.  
Caution Before starting data links, make sure that data link tables have been appropri-  
ately set at each node for which the data links are to be established. If the data  
link tables have been inappropriately set, the equipment may perform unex-  
pected operation and result in injury. Even if the data link tables have been ap-  
propriately set, always make sure that the equipment will not be affected before  
starting or stopping the data link.  
!
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the Contents  
6
Caution Once routing tables are transferred to a PC, all CPU Bus Units at the node (ex-  
cept SYSMAC BUS/2 Master Units) will be reset. Before transferring the routing  
tables, always make sure that the equipment will not be affected.  
!
5
6
Trademarks  
MS-DOS, Windows, Microsoft C, and Quick BASIC are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
IBM and IBM PAC-DOS are registered trademarks of International Business  
Machines Corporation (U.S.A.).  
PC-PR210H is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.  
ESC/P is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.  
Other brands and their products are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
their respective holders and should be noted as such.  
Checking the Contents  
Confirm that the following items are included with your purchase. These items  
are required to configure the C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2  
Installation disk (3.5 inch, 1 disk)  
Operation manual (B5 size, English)  
User registration cards (English and Japanese)  
Mailing label  
One operation manual (this manual)  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 1  
Features  
This section explains the features of the Controller Link Support Software and its operating environment.  
1-1 About the Controller Link Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-3 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-4 Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-5 Connecting to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2 Checking Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-1 C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller Link Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3-1 Compatible Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3-2 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-4 Overall Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-5 Menu Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2
2
3
3
4
5
7
7
7
7
8
9
10  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 1-1  
1-1 About the Controller Link Support Software  
The Controller Link Support Software is used to set up, control, and monitor  
Controller Link Networks.  
Functionality for Optical Ring Controller Link Networks has been added with this  
version. Ver. 2.00 of the Controller Link Support Software is required for Optical  
Ring Controller Link Networks. For other types of network, Ver. 1.10 (or earlier  
versions) can be used.  
1-1-1 Features  
Sets Data Link Tables  
The Controller Link Support Software can be used to create data link tables to  
manually set data links. It can also create data link areas used for automatically  
set data links.  
Run from Programming  
Device or from a Node  
The Controller Link Support Software can be run on an IBM PC/AT or compatible  
computer as a programming device connected to a PC via an RS-232C inter-  
face, or it can be run on an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer connected as a  
node to the Controller Link Network via a Controller Link Support Board.  
Compatible with All  
Controller Link Models  
The Controller Link Support Software supports all Controller Link Units and Con-  
troller Link Support Boards.  
Note The following products are available for the Controller Link Network.  
Controller Link Unit for SYSMAC CS1-series PCs (wired, and optical, and opti-  
cal ring)  
Controller Link Unit for SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE PCs (wired only)  
Controller Link Unit for SYSMAC CVM1 and CV-series PCs (wired and optical  
ring)  
Controller Link Unit for SYSMAC CQM1H PCs (wired only)  
Controller Link Support Board for IBM PC/AT or compatible computer (wired  
and optical)  
Print the Current Screen  
or Data  
The Controller Link Support Software can print the current screen or data.  
Create Routing Tables  
The Controller Link Support Software can create routing tables, which allow in-  
ter-network connections. Data files for routing tables can be shared with the  
SYSMAC Support Software.  
Set PC IDs  
The Controller Link Support Software allows you to create and edit PC IDs,  
which facilitate node management. Data files for PC IDs can be shared with the  
SYSMAC Support Software.  
Connect from Remote  
FA Networks  
When multiple FA networks are inter-connected, the Controller Link Support  
Software can be used to set and display all Controller Link Networks within a  
three-level hierarchy (including the local network).  
Note Here, FA networks include Controller Link, SYSMAC NET, and SYSMAC LINK  
Networks.  
Facilitate Unit  
Replacement  
The Controller Link Support Software can save in the computer all the settings  
stored in Controller Link Units or Controller Link Support Boards. Therefore, be-  
fore replacing a Controller Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board, you can  
save all the settings in the computer and restore them to the new Controller Link  
Unit or Controller Link Support Board. This will save you the trouble of redoing  
settings after replacement.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 1-1  
1-1-2 Functions  
The functions of the Controller Link Support Software are outlined in the follow-  
ing table.  
Function  
Explanation  
Data link management  
Creates and edits data link tables for manually set data  
links, registers data link tables at nodes, saves data link  
tables as files, and performs other processing related to  
data links.  
Network parameter  
setting  
Adjusts network communications parameter settings to  
provide the most suitable Controller Link  
communications for the user application.  
Routing table  
management  
Creates and edits routing tables, registers routing tables  
at nodes, and saves routing tables as files. Routing  
tables are used to specify data communications paths  
when data is transferred to/from remote FA networks.  
(See note.)  
Communications testing Checks whether the Controller Link Network is working  
properly.  
Status display  
Displays the network and node status, data link status,  
error logs, and so on.  
Maintenance  
Backs up the contents of the EEPROM in the Controller  
Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board as a file and  
restores the file to the EEPROM.  
Connection information  
reading  
Reads node configurations and the status of networks.  
(Only available for Optical Ring Networks.)  
PC ID editing  
Assigns a unique ID to each PC. Using PC IDs allows  
easier PC management than using network and node  
addresses.  
System setup  
Sets the communications parameters for the Controller  
Link Support Software, the PC to be connected, the  
service conditions for the Controller Link Support  
Software, and so on. These must be set before the  
Controller Link Support Software is connected to a node.  
Note Other FA networks, such as Controller Link Networks, SYSMAC NET  
Networks, and SYSMAC LINK Networks, can be inter-connected.  
1-1-3 Additional Functions  
The following functions were added to the Controller Link Support Software for  
when upgrading from Ver. 1.1j to Ver. 2.00.  
Optical Ring Controller Link Networks  
Connection configuration data for Optical Ring Controller Link Networks can  
be read using the Connection Information Menu. In addition, since an Optical  
Ring Network can have up to 62 nodes, the maximum number of nodes for  
which each menu’s functions can be used has been increased to 62 (from 32  
with Ver. 1.10).  
CS1-series PCs  
This version of the Controller Link Support Software can be directly connected  
to, and used with, CS1-series PCs.  
Saving and Printing of Error Log Files  
Error logs read from specified nodes can be saved to files, and this data can be  
read from the file and displayed. The error log data saved to files in this way,  
can be displayed and edited using a standard text editor, and used in other  
applications. It can also be printed out.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 1-1  
1-1-4 Main Functions  
Registering Data Link Tables  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
IBM PC/AT computer  
Create  
Data  
link  
tables  
Controller Link  
Network  
Data link table  
for #1 node  
(send and  
Transfer  
receive areas)  
Data link table  
for #2 node  
(send and  
Transfer  
Transfer  
receive areas)  
Data link table  
for #3 node  
(send and  
receive areas)  
Data link tables: Tables that specify the send areas at the local node and the numbers  
of words to be received from a particular areas at remote nodes.  
Starting and Stopping Data Links  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
PC (startup node)  
Controller Link Network  
Starting and stopping  
Displaying Network and Node Status  
Data link status monitor  
Data link area monitor  
Network monitor  
Node status display  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Controller Link Network  
Connection  
information  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
Optical Ring  
Controller Link  
Network  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 1-1  
Testing  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Controller Link Network  
Echoback test between the local  
node and the specified node  
Returns the test data unchanged.  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Controller Link Network  
Test data is broadcasted to all nodes the specified number of times and  
the success count is examined (broadcast test.)  
Displaying Error Logs  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Controller Link Network  
Reading error log  
Node Error code Date Time  
#2  
020C 96/09/10 10:00  
1-1-5 Connecting to the Network  
Connecting to a PC  
The Controller Link Support Software can be run from a computer that is con-  
nected to a Network PC as a dedicated programming device, i.e., one that is not  
a node on the Network.  
IBM PC/AT or  
compatible  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Controller Link Network  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 1-1  
The Controller Link Support Software can also be used simultaneously with the  
SYSMAC Support Software, i.e., it can be registered in the Option Menu of the  
SYSMAC Support Software.  
IBM PC/AT or  
compatible  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Controller Link Network  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
Option  
Menu  
SYSMAC Support  
Software  
Installing in a Computer  
Node  
The Controller Link Support Software can also be run directly from a Network  
computer.  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Controller Link Network  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
Supplemental Connection Information  
The Controller Link Support Software can be connected to PCs via modems.  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
Modem  
Modem  
Controller Link Network  
Controller Link  
Support Software  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Environment  
Section 1-3  
When multiple FA networks are inter-connected, the Controller Link Support  
Software can be used to set up and monitor up to three levels of Controller Link  
Networks, including the local network. In this case, set routing tables at each  
node.  
Running from a Computer Node  
SYSMAC NET Net-  
work (2nd network)  
4 Network levels  
are not possible  
Computer running the  
Controller Link Support  
Software  
Controller Link Network  
(1st network: local)  
Controller Link Net-  
work (3rd network)  
Controller Link Net-  
work (4th network)  
Running from a Programming Device  
Computer running the  
SYSMAC NET Net-  
Controller Link Support  
Software  
work (2nd network)  
4 Network levels  
are not possible  
Controller Link Network Controller Link Net- Controller Link Net-  
(1st network: local) work (3rd network) work (4th network)  
The connection to the  
PC is not counted as  
a network level.  
1-2 Checking Components  
When you first open the container, check the contents to be sure you have the  
product you ordered and that all items are present.  
1-2-1 C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller Link Support Software  
The C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller Link Support Software is used when  
connecting to a PC from a computer that is not a node on the Network.  
Installation disk (3.5): 1  
Operation manual (this manual): 1  
User registration card: 1  
1-3 Operating Environment  
1-3-1 Compatible Computers  
The Controller Link Support Software must be run on an IBM PC/AT or compat-  
ible computer.  
Controller Link  
Manufacturer  
Model  
Support Software  
C200HW-ZW3AT2-E Various  
-V2  
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer  
The computer must provide the following.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Environment  
Section 1-3  
Item  
Processor  
Specifications  
80386/80486 or higher  
450K bytes min.  
3 1/22HD  
Main memory  
Floppy disk  
Hard disk  
Display  
1M bytes min. empty disk space  
640 × 480 dots (i.e., a 640 × 480 dot display with Windows  
95/98)  
Keyboard  
OS  
The following keys are required: Home, Escape, Control,  
Page Up, Page Down, Backspace, F1 through F10, End,  
Insert, Delete, Tab.  
IBM PC-DOS 7.0 or later  
Microsoft MS-DOS 6.2 or later  
Windows 95/98  
1-3-2 Printers  
To print data from the Controller Link Support Software, use a printer that can  
execute the following emulation:  
Printer specifications  
PCL2 specifications  
IBM  
ESC/P  
The following printers are recommended:  
Printers  
HP Laser Jet 4P  
IBM 4202-003  
EPSON MJ-500  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overall Flow of Operation  
Section 1-4  
1-4 Overall Flow of Operation  
Install  
Type A:\>INSTALL then press the Enter Key.  
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen. The path to  
C:\CLK must be specified in AUTOEXEC.BAT.)  
Start  
Type C:\CLK>CLKSS then press the Enter Key.  
This screen is displayed for a  
few seconds.  
Select the desired item from the  
menus to perform setting or  
monitoring operations.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Hierarchy  
Section 1-5  
1-5 Menu Hierarchy  
This section shows the menu hierarchy of the Controller Link Support Software.  
The following illustration shows the overall flow of the menus; it does not show all  
the steps necessary to display individual menus.  
The menu items marked with asterisks (*) are valid only when a Controller Link  
Support Board is installed in the computer. If a Controller Link Support Board is  
not installed in the computer, these menu items cannot be selected.  
Note Use Controller LInk Support Software Ver. 1.10 when creating a Controller Link  
Network with a Controller Link Support Board. This version is included with the  
Support  
Board.  
Also,  
use  
the  
SYSMAC C200HW-ZW3AT2-E  
3G8F5-CLK11-E/CLK21-E Controller Link Support Software Operation Manual  
instead of this manual.  
Start Controller Link  
Support Software  
L
R
E
T
*
M
K
R
W
W
*
T
U
B
*
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 2  
Installation  
This section describes how to install the C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller Link Support Software.  
2-1 Preparations for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1-1 Check Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1-2 Backing Up the Installation Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
12  
12  
12  
13  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparations for Installation  
Section 2-1  
2-1 Preparations for Installation  
This section describes the knowledge required and tasks to be performed be-  
fore installation.  
2-1-1 Check Items  
Item  
Contents  
Product  
Installation disk: 1  
Operation manual (this manual): 1  
Operating environment See 1-3 Operating Environment (page 7.)  
2-1-2 Backing Up the Installation Disk  
Files may be erased or data may be corrupted by operation errors during instal-  
lation. Create a copy of the floppy disk of the Controller Link Support Software  
and use the disk containing the copy for installation. This will protect the master  
installation disk should any problem occur. Creation of a disk copy is called back-  
ing up the disk.  
Prepare one new floppy disk for the backup. After completing the backup, store  
the master disk (the original floppy disk) carefully. It will be necessary for future  
version upgrades. Use the copied disk for subsequent operation. If the copy is  
ever damaged, make a backup copy again. If the master disk is damaged,  
please return it to OMRON. OMRON will fix or replace the disk for a small  
charge.  
This section describes the backup procedure using the following drive structure  
as the example. If the drive structure is different, replace the drive name.  
Floppy disk drive:Drive A (for 3.52HD floppy disks)  
Hard disk drive: Drive C (contains the DOS system)  
Note 1) Write protect the Controller Link Support Software disk to ensure that files  
are not accidentally erased.  
2) Always create a backup copy for the Controller Link Support Software in or-  
der to provide protection against data corruption.  
3) Use the DISKCOPY command of DOS for backing up the disk. The disk to  
which data is to be copied need not be formatted since DISKCOPY com-  
mand formats the disk before copying.  
4) The operating system (MS-DOS) is not provided with the Controller Link  
Support Software.  
Required Items  
New floppy disk (3.52HD): 1  
Backup Procedure  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Turn on the power of the computer. In this example, the computer is started  
from the hard disk and command input is prompted as shown below.  
C:\>  
Note If other applications are running, terminate them and display the DOS  
command input prompt. Refer to the related manuals for your com-  
puter and application software.  
2. Write protect the floppy disk containing the Controller Link Support Board.  
3. Enter the following command (underlined section).  
C:\>DISKCOPY A: A:  
The following messages will be displayed.  
Insert SOURCE disk in Drive A:  
and press ENTER when ready...  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation Procedure  
Section 2-2  
4. Insert a disk of the Controller Link Support Software in Drive A.  
5. Press the Enter Key. The data on the disk will be read and the following mes-  
sages will be displayed after a short time.  
Insert TARGET disk in drive A:  
and press ENTER when ready...  
6. Remove the master disk of the Controller Link Support Software from drive  
A and insert a new floppy disk.  
7. Press the Enter Key. The data will be written to the new disk.  
8. If a message prompts replacing the disk, replace the disk in drive A accord-  
ing to the message.  
9. When copying is completed, the following message will be displayed.  
Create another copy (Y/N)?  
10. Press the N key. The following message will be displayed immediately.  
Copy another disk (Y/N)?  
11. Press the N key.  
Note Store the master installation disk carefully.  
2-2 Installation Procedure  
This section describes how to install the C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller  
Link Support Software to the hard disk of a DOS computer connected to a PC.  
In this example, the system environment is as follows:  
Floppy disk drive: Drive A  
Destination drive in hard disk: Drive C  
Destination directory: C:\CLK  
If the drives to be used are different from those shown in this example, replace  
drives A and C in the following descriptions with the actual drives to be used. Any  
directory name (up to 8 characters long) can be specified as the destination di-  
rectory.  
Always follow the procedure described in this section. Otherwise, the software  
may not be installed properly.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Turn on the power to the computer. The computer is started from the hard  
disk and command input is prompted as shown below.  
C:\>  
Note If another applications is started, terminate it and display a DOS com-  
mand input prompt. Refer to the related manuals for your computer  
and the application software.  
2. Insert the Controller Link Support Software disk into drive A.  
Note Be sure to use the backup disk previously created when installing the  
software.  
3. Change the current drive to drive A by entering the following command.  
C:\>A:  
4. Execute the installation program by entering the following command. Speci-  
fy in the underlined section the directory in which the Controller Link Support  
Software is to be installed. If a nonexistent directory is specified, it will be  
automatically created.  
A:\>INSTALL C:\CLK  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation Procedure  
Section 2-2  
When the installation program file is activated, the Controller Link Support  
Software files will be copied from the floppy disk to the hard disk. Follow the  
instructions displayed on the screen.  
Note If the destination directory is omitted, the files will be copied to  
C:\CLK.  
5. When the installation processing is complete, the following message will be  
displayed.  
Add ”path=%PATH%;C:\CLK” to AUTOEXEC.BAT.  
Command Usage : CLKSS  
6. Use a text editor to add the following line anywhere in the AUTOEXEC.BAT  
file as indicated by the message in step 5.  
path=%PATH%;C:\CLK  
This completes the installation procedure.  
Note If the Controller Link Support Software is registered in the SYSMAC Support  
Software, it can be started from the SYSMAC Support Softwares Option Menu.  
See Appendix C Registering the Controller Link Support Software in the SYS-  
MAC Support Software (page 163) for the registration procedure. We recom-  
mend that the Controller Link Support Software be registered in this way if the  
SYSMAC Support Software is already installed.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 3  
Basic Operations and Connections  
This section describes the Controller Link Support Software menu structure and basic operations, such as starting and exiting  
the software. It also describes how to connect the computer running the Controller Link Support Software to the Network.  
3-1 Starting and Exiting the Controller Link Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-1 Starting the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-2 Exiting the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2 Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2-1 Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2-2 Selecting Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2-3 Entering Word Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2-4 Selecting a File from the File List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2-5 Printing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3 Connecting to a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3-1 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3-2 PC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
16  
16  
18  
19  
19  
20  
20  
22  
23  
23  
23  
25  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and Exiting the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 3-1  
3-1 Starting and Exiting the Controller Link Support Software  
This section describes how to start and exit the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware.  
Note 1) In the following examples, all command strings are shown in uppercase.  
They can also be entered in lowercase.  
2) If the Controller Link Support Software is registered in the SYSMAC Support  
Software, it can be started from the SYSMAC Support Softwares Option  
Menu. See Appendix C Registering the Controller Link Support Software in  
the SYSMAC Support Software (page 163) for the registration procedure.  
3) The Controller Link Support Software can be run from Windows. See Ap-  
pendix D Running the Controller Link Support Software under Windows  
95/98 (page 165) for the procedure.  
3-1-1 Starting the Software  
This section describes how to start the Controller Link Support Software.  
In this example, the system environment is as follows:  
Hard disk: Drive C  
Directory for Controller Link Support Software: C:\CLK  
If the drive and directory to be used are different from those shown in this exam-  
ple, replace drive C and directory C:\CLK in the following descriptions with the  
actual drive and directory being used.  
Basic Procedure  
1, 2, 3...  
Turn on the power of the computer. The computer will be started from the  
hard disk and command input will be prompted as shown below.  
C:\>  
Note If another application is started, terminate it and display a DOS com-  
mand input prompt. Refer to the related manuals for your computer  
and the application software.  
Make sure that the current drive is the drive in which the Controller Link Sup-  
port Software has been installed.  
Note a) The current drive is the default drive that files are read from or writ-  
ten to. If a file name is specified without a drive name, the file will  
be searched or written in the current drive.  
b) When C:\> is displayed as shown in step , drive C is the current  
drive.  
If the current drive is not the drive in which the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware has been installed, enter the drive name as below to change the cur-  
rent drive.  
Example: When changing the current drive from drive A to drive C  
A:\>C:  
Enter the command shown below to change the current directory to the di-  
rectory in which the Controller Link Support Software has been installed.  
Specify in the underlined section the directory in which the Controller Link  
Support Software has been installed.  
Example: Controller Link Support Software is in directory CLK  
C:\>CD \CLK  
Note a) The current directory is the default directory that files are read  
from or written to. If a file is specified without a directory name, the  
file will be searched or written in the current directory.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and Exiting the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 3-1  
b) If the path to the Controller Link Support Software directory is spe-  
cified in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, this step need not be per-  
formed.  
Enter the following command string to start the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware.  
C:\CLK>CLKSS  
Note a) Options can be specified in the start command. See Start Options  
(on page 17) for details.  
b) If the Controller Link Support Software is started normally, the  
logo screen and the Main Menu will be displayed in order. The ver-  
sion number of the Controller Link Support Software appears on  
the logo screen.  
Startup Options  
The operation mode can be specified using options when starting the Controller  
Link Support Software. The option entry format is as follows:  
CLKSS /B [/OSSS path]  
/U  
Portions in brackets [ ] may  
be omitted. The brackets  
themselves are not input.  
Option  
Meaning  
/B  
/U  
The Controller Link Support Software is started for use with a  
Controller Link Support Board (as a node.) This option is valid  
only when a Controller Link Support Board is installed in the  
computer. If a Controller Link Support Board is not installed or  
does not operate normally, an error message will be displayed.  
The Controller Link Support Software is started for use with a  
Controller Link Unit (for connecting to a PC.) Even if the  
Controller Link Unit is not connected to a PC, no error will occur.  
The Controller Link Unit may be connected to PC only when  
data needs to be transferred between them.  
Both /B and The Controller Link Support Software is started in either of the  
/U omitted  
following modes, depending on the presence or absence of the  
driver for the Controller Link Support Board.  
When the driver exists: The Controller Link Support Software is  
started for use with the Controller Link Support Board (as a  
node.)  
When the driver does not exist: The Controller Link Support  
Software is started for use with the Controller Link Unit (for  
connecting to a PC.)  
/OSSS path The Controller Link Support Software is started with the same  
conditions as the SYSMAC Support Software by reading the  
information specified in the System Setup of the SYSMAC  
Support Software.  
In the SSS path, specify the directory in which the SYSMAC  
Support Software is installed (e.g., C:\SYSMATE.) The following  
system setup information is read.  
Communications parameters  
Printer model  
Data drive  
This option is invalid when the SYSMAC Support Software is not  
installed or does not operate normally.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and Exiting the Controller Link Support Software  
Section 3-1  
3-1-2 Exiting the Software  
1, 2, 3...  
Press the F1 (Menu) Key to display the Main Menu.  
If the Main Menu does not appear when the F1 Key is pressed, press the  
Escape Key or F10 (End) Key to terminate the active function, and then  
press the F1 Key.  
Select Q: Exit to DOSfrom the Main Menu.  
To select Q: Exit to DOS,press Q,or use the Up and Down Cursor Keys  
to highlight Q: Exit to DOSand then press the Enter Key.  
The Controller Link Support Software will terminate and the system will be  
ready to receive the next command as shown below.  
C:\>  
Note a) If the Controller Link Support Software is started from the SYS-  
MAC Support Software or Windows, it will return to the original  
state when terminated.  
b) If the Controller Link Support Software is started for use with the  
Controller Link Support Board, the Controller Link Support Board  
will be disconnected from the network when the software termi-  
nates. Then, an error indicating that the number of nodes partici-  
pating in the network has decreased (error code 0206 Hex) will be  
recorded in the error log in the other nodes connected to the net-  
work.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Section 3-2  
3-2 Basic Operations  
3-2-1 Screen Displays  
A sample screen for the Controller Link Support Software is shown below.  
Subfunction name  
The submenu item corresponding to the current  
function is displayed. Nothing is displayed when the  
current function (main menu item) has no submenu.  
Error message display area  
Function name  
An error message is displayed if an error occurs  
during Controller Link Support Software operation.  
The main menu item corresponding  
to the current function is displayed.  
Cursor  
The cursor indicates the  
selection or input object. On the  
menu, move the cursor to a  
desired item, then press the  
Enter Key. For setting, enter a  
character string or numerical  
value at the cursor position.  
Function Keys  
The Function Keys labels are arranged from left to right and correspond to the F1 to  
F10 Keys, respectively. Pressing a Function Key executes the displayed function.  
For example, pressing the F1 (Menu) Key displays the Main Menu. The functions of  
Function Keys differ according to the screen displayed.  
Note The display color of the function and subfunction name fields indicates the de-  
vice to which the Controller Link Support Software is connected.  
Blue: The Controller Link Support Software is running for connecting to a  
Controller Link Unit (for connecting to a PC.)  
Yellow: The Controller Link Support Software is running for use with the  
Controller Link Support Board (as a node.)  
The destination to which the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected  
can be selected by specifying an option when starting the software (see page  
17.)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Section 3-2  
3-2-2 Selecting Menu Items  
Menu items can be selected in either of the following two ways.  
Using Shortcut Keys  
As shown in the figure below, a letter is displayed on the left of each main menu  
item or submenu item. This key for this letter on the keyboard is called a shortcut  
key. You can select a menu item by simply pressing the corresponding shortcut  
key.  
Example: Data Link Submenu  
In this example, pressing Kat the Data Link Submenu selects K: Check  
table.”  
Using the Cursor  
Part of each Controller Link Support Software menu is always highlighted. This  
highlighted portion is called the cursor. The cursor indicates a selected object.  
To move the cursor, use the Up and Down Cursor Keys.  
Press the Enter Key to select the item at the cursor position.  
Example: Data Link Submenu  
In this example, pressing the Enter Key selects E:Edit table.”  
3-2-3 Entering Word Addresses  
The Controller Link Support Software displays the Function Keys at the bottom  
of the screen as shown below when the cursor moves to the word address entry  
field.  
The word address entry methods for CIO (IR), LR, and DM Areas are slightly  
different from that for the EM Area.  
Note When entering data in the first status word field, you can also use the Key  
and the Delete Key to set the first status word to its default value.  
Specifying CIO, LR, and DM Addresses  
1, 2, 3...  
Specify the data area by pressing the corresponding Function Key.  
In the following example, the DM Area is specified by pressing the F5 (DM)  
Key.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Section 3-2  
Example:  
[D00000  
Specify a word address by pressing the numeric keys.  
]
Each time a numeric key is pressed, the corresponding number appears on  
the right end of the highlighted portion and the other digits shift to the left.  
Example: When pressing 1, 2, and 5in this order  
[D00001  
]
[D00012  
]
[D00125 ]  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered data.  
The entered data will be automatically checked according to the node model  
specified as described in 5-3-15 Specifying Node Models (page 81.)  
Example:  
[D00125  
]
Note You cannot use the Backspace Key or the Delete Key when entering a word ad-  
dress. If an incorrect digit is entered, continue to enter digits until the correct five-  
digit number is entered. Each time a digit is entered, the incorrect digit shifts to  
the left and eventually disappears from the field.  
The Function Keys for data area selection (F3 to F6) are valid while a word ad-  
dress is being entered. If an incorrect digit is entered, the word address entry  
procedure can be canceled and restarted by pressing one of the F3 to F6 Keys.  
Specifying EM Addresses  
1, 2, 3...  
Press the F6 (EM) Key.  
The display will wait for input of the bank.  
Example:  
[E0_00000 ]  
Enter a bank number by pressing one of the numeric keys or Ato F.”  
The bank number must be a single-digit hexadecimal number. The bank  
number must be followed by a word address.  
Example: Pressing 1(bank number 1)  
[E1_00000 ]  
Specify a word address by pressing the numeric keys.  
Each time a numeric key is pressed, the corresponding number appears on  
the right end of the highlighted portion and the other digits shift to the left.  
Example: When pressing 4, 1, and 9in this order  
[E1_00004]  
[E1_00041 ]  
[E1_00419 ]  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered data.  
The entered data will be automatically checked according to the node model  
specified as described in 5-3-15 Specifying Node Models (page 81.)  
Example:  
[E1_00419 ]  
Note 1) You cannot use the Backspace Key or the Delete Key when entering a word  
address. If an incorrect digit is entered, continue to enter digits until the cor-  
rect five-digit number is entered. Each time a digit is entered, the incorrect  
digit shifts to the left and eventually disappears from the field.  
The Function Keys for area selection (F3 to F6) are valid while a word ad-  
dress is being entered. If an incorrect digit is entered, the word address entry  
procedure can be canceled and restarted by pressing one of the F3 to F6  
Keys.  
2) If an incorrect bank number is entered, it cannot be corrected. Press the F6  
(EM) Key to restart the entry procedure.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Section 3-2  
3-2-4 Selecting a File from the File List Screen  
The Controller Link Support Software allows you to display a list of files in a di-  
rectory and select one of the files. This will save you the trouble of entering file  
names and also prevent entry mistakes.  
Displaying a File List  
The F8 Key serves as the FilesFunction Key as shown below and allows you  
to select a file from the file list. File lists can be displayed in any window where the  
F8 Key has Filesdisplayed for it.  
Selecting from a File List  
1, 2, 3...  
Specify in the file name entry field the directory for which the file list is to be  
displayed. Enter a file name with Alphanumeric Keys, the Insert Key, the De-  
lete Key, and the Backspace Key.  
The character string before the last backslash (\) is treated as a directory  
name. When the window is first displayed, the directory specified in Data  
disk driveof the System setupMenu is displayed.  
Example:  
In this example, C:\CLK\DATA is treated as the directory name.  
Press the F8 (Files) Key.  
A list of files in the specified directory will be displayed.  
Example:  
Select a file.  
Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to a desired file, then press the En-  
ter Key. Subdirectories are displayed as <DIR> in the Sizecolumn. Select-  
ing a subdirectory displays a list of files in the subdirectory.  
Selecting a file will return you to the original screen. The specified file name  
will appear in the file name entry field.  
Example: Selecting LINE3.CLK  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
If necessary, you can press the F8 (Files) Key and select a file again from the  
file list.  
Press the Enter Key.  
The file will be selected.  
Note In the file list screen, you can switch to the file list of a subdirectory but cannot  
return to the parent directory. Press the Escape Key to return to the file name  
entry screen, then specify the directory again.  
3-2-5 Printing Screens  
The Controller Link Support Software allows you to print the screen from the  
connected printer.  
1, 2, 3...  
Make sure that the correct printer model is specified in Printer modelof the  
System setupMenu.  
Make sure that the printer is connected to the computer in which the Control-  
ler Link Support Software is running and that the printer is ready to operate.  
Press the Print Screen Key.  
The current screen images will be printed.  
Note The Controller Link Support Software cannot be operated while printing.  
3-3 Connecting to a Node  
3-3-1 Connection Method  
Running from a Computer Node  
If the Controller Link Support Software is being used in a computer in which a  
Controller Link Support Board is installed and the computer is connected as a  
Network node, you need not bother to connect the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware.  
If the Support Board is activated normally, the Controller Link Support Software  
will be automatically connected to nodes when started.  
Connecting to a PC  
If the computer in which the Controller Link Support Software is installed is to be  
connected to a PC, use the SYSMAC Support Software connection cable to con-  
nect the computer to the PC.  
Note The Controller Link Support Software communicates with a PC only when data  
is transferred between them. Therefore, you may connect the computer to a PC  
only when necessary to transfer data or monitor status.  
Peripheral Port on CS1-series PCs  
Computer  
Cable  
PC  
PC  
communications  
PC/AT  
CS1W-CN226/626 (D-Sub 9-pin dedicated connector)  
Peripheral port on Peripheral Bus or  
CS1-series PC Host Link  
RS-232C  
Peripheral port  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
Peripheral Port on C200HX/HG/HE PCs  
Computer  
Cable  
CQM1-CIF02 (D-Sub 9-pin dedicated connector)  
PC  
PC  
communications  
PC/AT  
Peripheral port on Peripheral Bus or  
C200HX/HG/HE  
PC  
Host Link  
RS-232C  
Peripheral port  
Peripheral Port on CVM1 and CV-series PCs  
Computer  
Cable  
PC  
PC com-  
munica-  
tions  
PC/AT  
CV500-CIF01 (D-Sub 25-pin dedicated connector)  
Peripheral  
device  
connector  
on CVM1 or  
CV-series  
PC  
Peripheral  
Bus  
If the RS-232C  
connector on the  
computer is a 9-pin  
connector, use a  
commercially available  
9-to-25-pin conversion  
adapter to connect the  
cable to the computer.  
RS-232C  
Peripheral device bus connector  
Peripheral Port on CQM1H PCs  
Computer  
Cable  
PC  
PC com-  
munica-  
tions  
PC/AT  
Peripheral  
port on  
Peripheral  
Bus or Host  
CQM1-CIF02 and CS1W-CN114  
CQM1H PC Link  
RS-232C Host Link Port on PC’s CPU Unit  
Computer  
Cable  
PC  
PC com-  
munica-  
tions  
PC/AT  
XW2Z-200S (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 9-pin)  
RS-232C  
port on  
CS1-series Link  
Peripheral  
Bus or Host  
XW2Z-500S (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 9-pin)  
If the RS-232C  
connector on the  
PC  
computer is a 9-pin  
connector, use a  
commercially available  
9-to-25-pin conversion  
adapter to connect the  
cable to the computer.  
RS-232C  
port on  
RS-232C port  
Host Link  
RS-232C  
C200HX/H  
G/HE (see  
note),  
CVM1,  
CV-series,  
or CQM1H  
PC  
Note Connection is only possible to a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit with an  
RS-232C port.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
RS-232C Port on Host Link Unit  
Computer  
Cable  
PC (Host  
Link Unit)  
PC com-  
munica-  
tions  
PC/AT  
CV500-LK201 port 1, in full-duplex mode:  
XW2Z-200S (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 9-pin)  
XW2Z-500S (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 9-pin)  
CV500-LK201 port 2, in full-duplex mode:  
XW2Z-200P (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 25-pin)  
XW2Z-500P (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 25-pin)  
RS-232C  
port on  
Host LInk  
Unit for  
CVM1 or  
CV-series  
PC  
Host Link  
(CV500-LK  
201)  
RS-232C  
RS-232C port  
Select an appropriate cable according to the shape of the RS-232C connector  
on the Host Link Unit.  
RS-232C Port on Serial Communications Board/Unit  
Computer  
Cable  
PC(Serial  
Communic  
ations  
PC com-  
munica-  
tions  
Board/Unit)  
PC/AT  
XW2Z-200S (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 9-pin)  
XW2Z-500S (D-Sub 25-pin D-Sub 9-pin)  
RS-232C  
port on  
Serial Com-  
munications  
Board  
Host Link  
(CS1W-SC  
B21/41) or  
Serial Com-  
munications  
Unit  
RS-232C  
RS-232C port  
(CS1W-SC  
U21) for  
CS1-series  
PC  
3-3-2 PC Settings  
Peripheral Bus  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to communicate with a PC via the pe-  
ripheral bus, the PC must be set to the same baud rate as the Controller Link  
Support Software.  
Note See 5-14-3 Setting PC Communications (on page 137) in 5-14 System Setup to  
set the baud rate for the Controller Link Support Software.  
CS1-series PCs  
Connecting to Peripheral Port  
When connecting to the peripheral port on the CPU Unit, set DIP switch pin 4 to  
OFF, and set the baud rate for the Controller Link Support Software to the maxi-  
mum value (19,200 bps). Alternatively, set DIP switch pin 4 to ON and make the  
PC Setup settings for the CPU Unit using CX-Programmer. Select the peripheral  
port and set the serial communications mode to peripheral bus, and make the  
same communications settings as the Controller Link Support Software.  
Connecting to RS-232C Port  
When connecting to the RS-232C port on the CPU Unit, set DIP switch pin 5 to  
ON, and set the baud rate for the Controller Link Support Software to the maxi-  
mum value (19,200 bps). Alternatively, set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF and make the  
PC Setup settings for the CPU Unit using CX-Programmer. Select the RS-232C  
port and set the serial communications mode to peripheral bus, and make the  
same communications settings as the Controller Link Support Software.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs  
Set the same baud rate as the Controller Link Support Software in PC Setup  
words DM 6650 and DM 6651 of the CPU Unit.  
Setting the Standard Communications Parameters  
Peripheral port: DM 6650  
Communications parameters  
0: Standard communications parameters (9600 bps)  
1: According to DM6651  
Initial status: 0000 (Standard communications parameters at 9,600 bps.)  
Setting the Baud Rate  
Peripheral port: DM 6651 bits 0 to 7  
Baud rate  
00: 1200 bps (see note)  
01: 2400 bps  
02: 4800 bps  
03: 9600 bps  
04: 19200 bps  
Initial status: 0000 (1200 bps)  
Note The baud rate cannot be set to 1,200 bps for the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
CVM1 and CV-series PCs  
Use DIP switch pins 1 and 2 on the CPU Unit to set the same baud rate as the  
Controller Link Support Software.  
DIP switch pins  
Baud rate  
1
2
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
50 Kbps (see note)  
19,200 bps  
9,600 bps  
4,800 bps  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
Note The baud rate cannot be set to 50 kbps for the Controller Link Support  
Software.  
DIP switch  
CQM1H PCs  
Connecting to Peripheral Port  
Use one of the following methods when connecting to the peripheral port on the  
CPU Unit.  
a) Set DIP switch pins 5 and 7 to ON, and set the baud rate for the Controller  
Link Support Software to 9,600 bps.  
b) Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF and pin 7 to ON, and set the PC Setup word  
DM 6650 (peripheral port settings) to 0000 Hex (standard setting). Set  
the baud rate for the Controller Link Support Software to 9,600 bps.  
c) Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF and pin 7 to ON, and set the PC Setup word  
DM 6650 (peripheral port settings) to 0001 Hex (settings according to  
DM 6651). Set the communications settings (DM 6651: peripheral port  
settings) to the same settings as the Controller Link Support Software.  
Set the baud rate for the Controller Link Support Software to a value in  
the range 2,400 to 19,200 bps.  
Connecting to RS-232C Port  
Peripheral bus connection to the RS-232C port is not possible.  
Host Link  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to communicate with a PC via a Host  
Link, the PC must be set to the same communications parameters as the Con-  
troller Link Support Software.  
Note See 5-14-3 Setting PC Communications (on page 137) in 5-14 System Setup to  
set the communications parameters for the Controller Link Support Software.  
CS1-series PCs  
Connecting to Peripheral Port  
When connecting to the peripheral port on the CPU Unit, set DIP switch pin 5 to  
ON and make the PC Setup settings for the CPU Unit using CX-Programmer.  
Select the peripheral port and set the serial communications mode to Host Link,  
and make the same communications settings as the Controller Link Support  
Software.  
Connecting to RS-232C Port  
When connecting to the RS-232C port on the CPU Unit, set DIP switch pin 5 to  
OFF and make the PC Setup settings for the CPU Unit using CX-Programmer.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
Select the RS-232C port and set the serial communications mode to Host Link,  
and make the same communications settings as the Controller Link Support  
Software.  
CS1-series Serial  
Communications  
Board/Unit  
In the software switch settings of the Serial Communications Board/Unit regis-  
tered in the CX-Programmers I/O table, select the serial port for connection, set  
the serial communications mode to Host Link, and make the same communica-  
tions settings as the Controller Link Support Software.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs  
Use the PC Setup (DM Area) of the PC to set the communications parameters  
for the port to be used (peripheral port or RS-232C port.)  
Note When DIP switch pin 5 on the CPU Unit is set to ON, the communications param-  
eters are set as follows, regardless of the PC Setup:  
Communications:  
Node No.:  
Start bits:  
Data bits:  
Stop bits:  
Host Link mode  
00  
1 bit  
7 bits  
2 bits  
Parity:  
Even  
Baud rate:  
9,600 bps  
Transmission delay: None  
Setting Standard Communications Parameters  
RS-232C port: DM6645  
Communications mode  
Set to (0: Host Link)  
Not related when Host Link is set  
CTS control (Yes/No)  
Communications parameters  
0: Standard communications parameters  
1: According to DM 6646  
Initial status: 0000 (Standard communications at 9,600 bps.)  
Bits 8 to 11 are valid for only the master node with 1:1 link.  
Bits 0 to 7 and 12 to 15 are valid only when DIP switch pin 5 on the CPU Unit is set  
to OFF.  
The standard communications parameters are as follows:  
Start bits:  
Data bits:  
Stop bits:  
Parity:  
1 bit  
7 bits  
2 bits  
Even  
Baud rate: 9,600 bps  
Always set the mode to be used.  
If the above communications parameters are acceptable, specify 00 in the lower  
two digits.  
Setting Communications Parameters  
The Controller Link Support Software can communicate with PC only when DIP  
switch pin 5 on the CPU Unit is set to OFF and DM 6645 is set to use DM 6646  
settings.  
RS-232C port: DM 6646  
Transmission frame format (see table)  
Baud rate (see table)  
Initial status: 0000 (Start bits: 1, Data length: 7, Stop bits: 1, Even parity, 1,200 bps.)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
Transmission Frame Format  
Setting Start Data Stop Parity Setting Start Data Stop Parity  
bits length bits bits length bits  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
2
2
2
Even  
Odd  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
2
2
2
Even  
Odd  
None  
Even  
Odd  
None  
Even  
Odd  
None  
None  
Baud Rate  
Setting  
Baud rate  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
1,200 bps  
2,400 bps  
4,800 bps  
9,600 bps  
19,200 bps  
The baud rate cannot be set to 1,200 bps for the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware.  
Set the communications parameters for the PC according to the communica-  
tions parameters for the Controller Link Support Software.  
Setting the Node Number  
RS-232C port: DM 6648  
Node no. (2 digit BCD) 00 to 31  
Initial status: 00 (node no. 00.)  
When multiple PCs are connected to the host computer, a node number is as-  
signed to each PC for identification purposes. Assign the PC the same node  
number as that specified in the Controller Link Support Software.  
CVM1 and CV-series PCs  
Use the DIP switch on the PC and the PC Setup to set the communications pa-  
rameters for the Host Link connection.  
Note Use the SYSMAC Support Software to set up the PC Setup.  
I/O port setting (selector switch)  
Set the selector switch to RS-232C.  
System setup (DIP switch pin 4)  
To set to the values specified by the DIP switch: Set DIP switch pin 4 to ON.  
To set to the values specified in the PC Setup: Set DIP switch pin 4 to OFF.  
Note For CPU Units manufactured before June 1995 (lot No.  
jj65), the default values specified by the DIP switch differ  
from those specified in PC Setup as follows:  
Commu-  
nications  
port  
RS-232C  
The default values specified by the DIP switch are 2,400 bps,  
one stop bit, even parity, and 7-bit data length.  
RS-422  
The default values specified in the PC Setup are 9,600 bps, two  
stop bits, even parity, and 7-bit data length.  
For CPU Units manufactured after July 1995 (lot No. jj75), the  
values specified in the DIP switch have been changed to 9,600 bps  
and two stop bits to make them identical with those of the PC  
Setup.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
CVM1/CV-series Host  
Link Unit  
Set the communications parameters for the port to be used (port 1 or 2) with the  
rotary switches, DIP switch, and CPU Bus Unit System Setup of the CVM1/CV-  
series Host Link Unit (CV500-LK201).  
Setting the Node Number for Communications Port 2  
When multiple PCs are connected to the host computer, a node number is as-  
signed to each PC for identification purposes. Decimal numbers 0 to 31 can be  
assigned as the node number of communications port 2. Set the tens digit with  
the left switch and the ones digit with the right switch.  
Setting Example  
Node No.  
1
0
x 10  
x 10  
Node No.29  
Note 1) Do not specify a node number higher than 31. Doing so results in a error and  
lights the ERC2 indicator on the display panel.  
2) Since the Controller Link Support Software and the Host Link Unit are al-  
ways connected on the one-to-one basis, the node number can normally be  
0.  
3) The node number of communications port 1 is fixed at 0.  
DIP Switch Settings of CVM1/CV-series Host Link Units  
Communications port 1  
(RS-232C)  
Communications port 2  
(RS-232C/RS-422A)  
Communications port switch  
(RS-232C/RS-422A)  
DIP switch  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
For each DIP switch pin, ON is on the left side and OFF is on the right side.  
No.  
Function  
Setting  
Meaning  
1
Communications  
ON  
The communications parameters  
for communications ports 1 and 2  
are as follows:  
parameter settings (for  
communications ports 1  
and 2) (see note)  
Baud rate: 9,600 bps  
Stop bits: 2 bits  
Parity: Even  
Data bits: 7 bits  
Xon/Xoff control: No  
Communications method: Full  
duplex  
OFF  
The values specified for the CPU  
Bus Unit System in the PC are  
used as communications  
parameters. The initial values are  
as follows:  
Baud rate: 9,600 bps  
Stop bits: 2 bits  
Parity: Even  
Data bits: 7 bits  
Xon/Xoff control: Not  
Communications method: Full  
duplex  
2
3
CTS switch  
(communications port 1)  
ON  
The CTS signal (ready to receive)  
is always set to ON (0 V fixed.)  
Always set this switch pin to ON  
when connecting the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
OFF  
ON  
Cannot be set.  
CTS switch  
(communications port 2)  
The CTS signal (ready to receive)  
is always set to ON (0 V fixed.)  
Always set this switch pin to ON  
when connecting the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
OFF  
ON  
Cannot be set.  
4
5
Reserved for system use  
Loopback test  
Cannot be set.  
OFF  
ON  
Always set this bit to OFF.  
Cannot be set when the  
Controller Link Support Software  
is connected.  
OFF  
ON  
Always set this switch pin to OFF  
when connecting the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
6
Test port selection  
Cannot be set when the  
Controller Link Support Software  
is connected.  
OFF  
Always set this switch pin to OFF  
when connecting the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
Note For Host Link Units manufactured after July 1995 (lot No.**75), the communica-  
tions parameter settings when DIP switch pin 1 is ON are as shown in the table  
above.  
For Host Link Units manufactured before June 1995 (lot No.**65), the commu-  
nications parameter settings are different from the above (baud rate = 2,400  
bps, stop bits = 1 bit.)  
CPU Bus Unit System Setup  
Item  
Baud rate  
Setting  
Initial value  
9,600 bps  
Specify the baud rate.  
Select 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 bps.  
Specify the stop bit length.  
Select 1 or 2 stop bits.  
Stop bits  
Parity  
2 bits  
Specify the parity check.  
Even parity  
First, select Parityor No parity.If  
Parity is selected, specify even or odd  
parity.  
Data bits  
Specify the send data bit length.  
Select 7 bits or 8 bits.  
7 bits  
No  
Xon/Xoff control  
Specify whether Xon/Xoff control is to  
be performed. This item is valid only in  
full duplex mode.  
Select Yes or No.  
Communications  
mode  
Specify the communications mode.  
Half duplex is valid only for RS-232C  
interface.  
Full duplex  
No  
Select full duplex or half duplex.  
Retries  
Specify whether data is to be resent  
from scratch when transmission is  
interrupted. This item is valid in half  
duplex mode.  
Select No or Yes.  
Send stop code  
(Xoff)  
Specify the Xoff (send stop) code. This 13 Hex  
item is valid only when Xon/Xoff control  
is performed.  
Send stop release  
code (Xon)  
Specify an Xon (send stop release)  
code. This item is valid only when  
Xon/Xoff control is performed.  
11 Hex  
Transmission delay Specify the delay from the time the RS 0 ms  
signal is turned on until data is  
transmitted. This item is valid only in  
half duplex mode.  
Specify a value between 00 and  
FF Hex (between 0 and 255 in decimal)  
The transmission delay is determined  
by multiplying the setting by 2 ms (0 to  
510 ms.)  
If 00 Hex (0 ms) is specified, data will  
be transmitted 1 ms after the RS signal  
is turned on.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
Use the CPU Bus Unit System Setup of the SYSMAC Support Software to set the  
bit strings as follows:  
Communications Port 1  
Byte b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
0
[+0]  
Data length  
0: 7 bits  
1: 8 bits  
Parity  
0: Even  
1: Odd  
Parity check  
0: Yes  
1: No  
Stop bits  
0: 2 bits  
1: 1 bit  
b7 b6 b5  
Baud rate  
9,600 bps  
2,400 bps  
4,800 bps  
9,600 bps  
19,200 bps  
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
[+1]  
0
0
0
0
0
Retries  
0: No  
1: Yes  
Communications mode  
0: Full duplex  
1: Half duplex  
Xon/Xoff control:  
0: No  
1: Yes  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Specify an Xoff (send stop) code.  
[+2]  
[+3]  
[+4]  
The initial value is 13 Hex and the bit string is as follows:  
13 Hex = 0001 0011  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Specify an Xon (send stop release) code.  
The initial value is 11 Hex and the bit string is as follows:  
11 Hex = 0001 0001  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Specify the transmission delay.  
The initial value is 00 Hex (0 ms) and the bit string is as follows:  
00 Hex = 0000 0000  
Set all bits of bytes [+5] to [+9] to 0.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
Communications Port 2  
Byte b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
0
[+10]  
Data length  
0: 7 bits  
1: 8 bits  
Parity  
0: Even  
1: Odd  
Parity check  
0: Yes  
1: No  
Stop bits  
0: 2 bits  
1: 1 bit  
b7 b6 b5  
Baud rate  
9,600 bps  
2,400 bps  
4,800 bps  
9,600 bps  
19,200 bps  
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
[+11]  
0
0
0
0
0
Retries  
0: No  
1: Yes  
Communications mode  
0: Full duplex  
1: Half duplex  
Xon/Xoff control:  
0: No  
1: Yes  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Specify an Xoff (send stop) code.  
[+12]  
[+13]  
[+14]  
The initial value is 13 Hex and the bit string is as follows:  
13 Hex = 0001 0011  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Specify an Xon (send stop release) code.  
The initial value is 11 Hex and the bit string is as follows:  
11 Hex = 0001 0001  
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Specify the transmission delay.  
The initial value is 00 Hex (0 ms) and the bit string is as follows:  
00 Hex = 0000 0000  
Set all bits of bytes [+15] to [+19] to 0.  
CQM1H PCs  
Connecting to Peripheral Port  
Use one of the following methods when connecting to the peripheral port on the  
CPU Unit.  
a) Set DIP switch pins 5 and 7 to ON, and set the baud rate for the Controller  
Link Support Software to 9,600 bps.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a Node  
Section 3-3  
b) Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF and pin 7 to ON, and set the PC Setup word  
DM 6650 (peripheral port settings) to 0000 Hex (standard setting). Set  
the baud rate for the Controller Link Support Software to 9,600 bps.  
c) Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF and pin 7 to ON, and set the PC Setup word  
DM 6650 (peripheral port settings) to 0001 Hex (settings as in DM 6651).  
Set the communications settings (DM 6651: peripheral port settings) to  
the same settings as the Controller Link Support Software. Set the baud  
rate for the Controller Link Support Software to a value in the range 2,400  
to 19,200 bps.  
Connecting to RS-232C Port  
Use one of the following methods when connecting to the RS-232C port on the  
CPU Unit.  
a) Set DIP switch pin 5 to ON, and set the baud rate for the Controller Link  
Support Software to 9,600 bps.  
b) Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF, and set the PC Setup word DM 6645  
(RS-232C port settings) to 0000 Hex (standard setting). Set the baud  
rate for the Controller Link Support Software to 9,600 bps.  
c) Set DIP switch pin 5 to OFF, and set the PC Setup word DM 6645  
(RS-232C port settings) to 0001 Hex (settings as in DM 6646). Set the  
communications settings (DM 6646: RS-232C port settings) to the same  
settings as the Controller Link Support Software. Set the baud rate for  
the Controller Link Support Software to a value in the range 2,400 to  
19,200 bps.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 4  
Basic Operating Procedures  
This section outlines operating procedures for the Controller Link Support Software. Actual procedures are provided in Sec-  
tion 5 Operating Procedures.  
4-1 Starting the Network for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2 Starting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2-1 Manually Set Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2-2 Automatically Set Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3 Interconnecting Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
38  
38  
38  
39  
39  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting Data Links  
Section 4-2  
4-1 Starting the Network for the First Time  
1, 2, 3...  
1. System Setup  
Set up the Controller Link Support Software operating environment and the  
PCs to be connected.  
This step does not necessarily need to be performed first, but it does need to  
be performed before transferring data between the Controller Link Support  
Software and nodes, printing data, or executing the functions on theMainte-  
nance Menu.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu I:System setup  
2. Broadcast Test  
If necessary, conduct a communications test for the entire network to check  
for any communications problems.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu D:Broadcast test  
3. Echoback Test  
If necessary, conduct a communications test (stricter than the broadcast  
test) for each node and make sure that the Controller Link Support Software  
can communicate normally with each node.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu N:Echoback test  
4. PC IDs (This step is optional.)  
Assign a PC ID to each node to facilitate node management and Controller  
Link Support Software operations.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu W:Edit PC ID  
4-2 Starting Data Links  
4-2-1 Manually Set Data Links  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Setting Device Information  
Specify the model of each node on the Controller Link Network. This in-  
formation is used to perform word address validity checks when data link  
tables are created or edited.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) I:Device Info set  
2. Creating Data Link Tables  
Data link tables are required for manually set data links.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link  
3. Checking Data Link Tables  
Check the created data link tables for errors or inconsistencies.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) K:Check table  
4. Transferring the Data Link Tables  
Transfer the created data link tables to the nodes.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) T:Transfer table  
W:ComputerController Link  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interconnecting Networks  
Section 4-3  
5. Starting the Data Links  
After the data link tables have been transferred, start the data links.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) R:Start/Stop  
Caution Before starting data links, make sure that data link tables have been appropri-  
ately set at each node for which the data links are to be established. If the data  
link tables have been inappropriately set, the equipment may perform unex-  
pected operation and result in injury. Even if the data link tables have been ap-  
propriately set, always make sure that the equipment will not be affected before  
starting or stopping the data link.  
!
6. Checking Data Link Operation  
Use the operation status monitor to check whether the data links are operat-  
ing normally.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) M:Monitor status  
7. Saving the Data Link Tables  
After the data link operates normally, save the data link tables as a file.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) S:Save table  
4-2-2 Automatically Set Data Links  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Starting the Data Links (After the Data Link Tables Have Been Trans-  
ferred to the Nodes)  
For automatically set data links, set the data link auto setting parameters for  
the data link startup node. Refer to the Controller Link Unit Operation Manu-  
al (W309) for details.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) R:Start/Stop  
WARNING Before starting a data link, make sure that data link parameters have been  
appropriately set at the data link start-up node. If the data link parameters have  
been inappropriately set, the equipment may perform unexpected operation and  
result in injury. Even if the data link parameters have been appropriately set,  
always make sure that the equipment will not be affected before starting or  
stopping the data link.  
!
2. Checking Data Link Operation  
Use the operation status monitor function to check whether the data links  
are operating normally.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu L:Data Link Data Link submenu (F2) M:Monitor status  
4-3 Interconnecting Networks  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Creating Routing Tables  
Routing tables are required when multiple FA networks are connected.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu R:Routing table  
2. Checking the Routing Tables  
Check the created routing tables for errors or inconsistencies.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu R:Routing table Routing table submenu (F2) K:Check  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interconnecting Networks  
Section 4-3  
3. Transferring the Routing Tables  
Transfer the routing tables to nodes.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu R:Routing table Routing table submenu (F2) T:Trans-  
fer W:Computer PC/Board  
4. Saving the Routing Tables  
Routing tables can be edited for only one node at a time. Therefore, always  
save the routing tables as a file after transferring them to the node.  
Repeat the routing table creation/check/transfer/save procedures until the  
routing tables are registered at all nodes.  
Main Item Selection  
Main Menu R:Routing table Routing table submenu (F2) S:Save  
Caution Once routing tables are transferred to a PC, all CPU Bus Units at the node will be  
reset. This is for the purpose of reading and enabling the set routing tables.  
Before transferring the routing tables, always make sure that the equipment will  
not be affected.  
!
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 5  
Operating Procedures  
This section describes individual operating procedures for the Controller Link Support Software.  
5-1 Keyboard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3 L: Data Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-1 Data Link Areas and Data Link Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-2 Setting Data Link Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-3 Displaying the Data Link Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-4 Creating and Editing Data Link Tables E: Edit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-5 Copying Data Link Tables Y: Copy Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-6 Initializing All Data Link Tables C: Initialize Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-7 Checking Data Link Tables K: Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-8 Saving Data Link Tables as a File S: Save Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-9 Reading Data Link Tables from a File L: Retrieve Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-10 Transferring Data Link Tables T: Transfer Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-11 Deleting Data Link Tables from Nodes D: Delete Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-12 Printing Data Link Tables P: Print Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-13 Starting and Stopping Data Links R: Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-14 Displaying Data Link Status M: Monitor Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-15 Specifying Node Models I: Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-4 P: Set Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5 R: Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-1 Outline of Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-2 Setting Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-3 Communications Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-4 Displaying the Routing Table Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-5 Creating and Editing Routing Tables E: Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-6 Checking Routing Tables K: Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-7 Initializing Routing Tables C: Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-8 Saving Routing Tables as a File S: Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-9 Reading Routing Tables from the File L: Retrieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-10 Transferring Routing Tables T: Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-11 Deleting Routing Tables from a Node D: Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5-12 Printing Routing Tables P: Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-6 N: Echoback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-7 D: Broadcast Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-8 C: Monitor Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9 E: Display Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9-1 About Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9-2 Data Formats for Error Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9-3 Displaying the Error Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9-4 Reading Error Logs R: Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9-5 Reading Error Logs from a File L: Retrieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9-6 Saving Error Logs as a File S: Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9-7 Printing Error Logs P: Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-10 S: Display Node Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-11 M: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-11-1 Displaying the Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-11-2 Backing Up Unit EEPROM U: Unit Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-11-3 Initializing Network Parameters C: Initialize Network Parameters . . . . . . . . .  
43  
43  
45  
46  
51  
51  
52  
59  
60  
61  
64  
66  
67  
74  
75  
77  
78  
81  
83  
85  
86  
87  
87  
88  
88  
91  
93  
93  
94  
94  
98  
99  
100  
101  
103  
104  
105  
105  
106  
106  
108  
108  
108  
109  
112  
113  
113  
114  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section  
5-12 K: Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-12-1 About Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
115  
115  
5-12-2 Displaying the Connection Information Menu  
(Network Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
119  
119  
122  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
129  
129  
129  
130  
131  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
135  
136  
137  
140  
141  
141  
142  
5-12-3 Reading Connection Information R: Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-12-4 Reading Connection Information from a File L: Retrieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-12-5 Saving Connection Information as a File S: Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-12-6 Printing Connection Information P: Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13 W: Edit PC ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-1 About PC IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-2 Displaying the PC ID Edit Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-3 Creating and Editing PC IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-4 Displaying the Edit PC ID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-5 Saving PC ID Data as a File S: Save PC ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-6 Reading PC ID Data from a File L: Retrieve PC ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-7 Specifying Multiple Nodes F: FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-8 Clearing Multiple PC IDs C: Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-9 Printing PC ID Data P: Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-10 Checking PC ID Data K: Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-11 Sorting PC ID Data O: Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-13-12 Searching PC ID Data R: Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14 I: System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14-1 About the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14-2 Displaying the System Setup I: System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14-3 Setting PC Communications C: PC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14-4 Setting the Node Response Time T: Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14-5 Setting the Printer Model P: Printer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-14-6 Setting the Data Directory D: Data Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-15 Q: Exit to DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Menu  
Section 5-2  
5-1 Keyboard Operation  
This section describes the keys used to operate the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware.  
Operation  
Display a menu  
Key  
End  
Return to previous step  
Display the previous screen  
Display the next screen  
Print screen  
Esc  
Page Up  
Page Down  
Print Screen  
Backspace  
Insert  
Delete one character back  
Insert space  
Delete one character forward  
Delete  
5-2 Main Menu  
The Controller Link Support Software displays the Main Menu when the F1  
(Menu) Key is pressed at any screen.  
The Main Menu consists of the following items.  
Menu item  
L: Data Link  
Function  
Page  
Performs various data link operations such as 45  
creating and editing data link tables,  
transferring data link tables to nodes, starting  
and stopping data links, and displaying  
operating status.  
This item has the following menu.  
P: Set Network  
parameters  
Modifies network communications  
parameters to provide the most suitable  
Controller Link communications for the user  
application.  
83  
85  
R: Routing table  
Creates or edits routing tables and transfers  
them to nodes when multiple FA networks are  
interconnected.  
This item has the following menu.  
N: Echoback test  
Conducts a communications test for the  
specified node. This item can be used to  
locate faulty sections when a  
100  
communications error occurs.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Menu  
Section 5-2  
Menu item  
Function  
Page  
D: Broadcast test  
Transmits the same data to all nodes within  
the Controller Link Network. Use this item to  
check the status of communications with all  
nodes within the network.  
101  
C: Monitor Network  
E: Display Error log  
Displays the network participation status and 103  
data link status for all nodes within the  
Controller Link Network. Use this item to  
locate faulty sections.  
Reads and displays the error log recorded at 104  
the specified node. Network problems can be  
examined by checking the past error log.  
S: Display Node status Displays the operating status of the specified 109  
node. Use this item to isolate the cause of an  
error that has occurred to a node.  
M: Maintenance  
Reads and writes data from/to EEPROM in  
the Controller Link Unit or Controller Link  
Support Board and initializes network  
parameters. Use this item for network  
maintenance.  
112  
This item has the following menu.  
K: Connection  
Information  
Displays the order of connection for the  
nodes that make up the Optical Ring  
115  
Controller Link Network, as well as the  
connection status, and the contents of errors.  
This data can be stored in files from which  
they can be read and displayed. This function  
can only be used with Optical Ring Networks.  
Any attempt to use it with a different type of  
network will result in an error.  
This item has the following menu.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Sets and edits a unique PC ID for each PC.  
Using PC IDs allows easier PC management  
than using network and node addresses.  
124  
This item has the following menu.  
I: System setup  
Sets the method of communications between 135  
the Controller Link Support Software and the  
node to be connected, the service conditions  
for the Controller Link Support Software, and  
so on.  
These settings must be set before the  
Controller Link Support Software is  
connected to a node.  
Q: Exit to DOS  
Exits the Controller Link Support Software.  
142  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
5-3 L: Data Link  
L: Data Linkis used to perform various data link operations for the Controller  
Link. It has the following menu.  
Menu item  
E: Edit table  
Function  
Page  
Creates and edits data link tables.  
These tables are created in the  
computer memory. To register data link  
tables at each node, execute  
T: Transfer table.”  
52  
59  
Y: Copy table  
Copies data link tables within the  
memory. A data link table can be easily  
created by copying and changing a  
similar data link table.  
C: Initialize table  
Initializes (clears) all data link tables in  
the memory. Use this item to create data  
link tables from scratch.  
60  
61  
K: Check table  
S: Save table  
Checks all data link tables in the  
memory for errors or inconsistencies.  
Saves all data link tables in the memory 64  
as a file.  
L: Retrieve table  
T: Transfer table  
Reads data link tables from a file to the 66  
memory.  
Writes data link tables from the memory 67  
to each node or reads data link tables  
from each node to the memory. Data  
link tables in the memory can also be  
compared with the data link tables at  
each node.  
D: Delete table  
Deletes data link tables from the  
specified node to remove the node from  
the data links.  
74  
P: Print table  
Prints data link tables in the memory.  
Starts and stops data links.  
75  
77  
78  
R: Start/Stop  
M: Monitor status  
Displays the data link status or writes  
data to send areas. This item can be  
used to check data link operations.  
This item is valid only when the  
Controller Link Support Software is  
installed in a computer with a Controller  
Link Support Board.  
I: Device Info set  
Sets the model of each node in the  
network. Even when nodes are not  
connected to the Controller Link  
Network, this item can be used to set  
the network configuration to check data  
link tables.  
81  
167  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
5-3-1 Data Link Areas and Data Link Tables  
Manually set data links are created by setting data link areas in data link tables.  
There are two types of Data Link Table Edit Screen.  
Node Information Screen  
The Node Information Screens are used to specify the nodes for which data link  
tables are to be created or edited. The Data Link Table Screens can be displayed  
from these screens. There are two Node Information Screens (one for nodes 1 to  
32, and one for nodes 33 to 62) available for one Controller Link Network.  
Data Link Table Screens  
The Data Link Table Screens are used to create or edit a data link table for each  
node. One screen is provided for each node.  
Main Menu  
Data Link Table  
Edit Screens  
F4 Key  
Page Up Key  
Node Information  
Screen  
Node Information  
Screen  
(nodes 1 to 32)  
(nodes 33 to 62)  
F5 Key  
Page Down Key  
F10 (End) Key  
ESC Key  
Node selection  
F8 Key  
Page Up Key  
F8 Key  
Page Up Key  
Data Link Table  
Screen  
(next node)  
Data Link Table  
Data Link Table  
Screen  
(previous node)  
Screen  
(selected node)  
F9 Key  
F9 Key  
Page Down Key  
Page Down Key  
Select Edit tablefrom the Data Link Menu to go to a Node Information Screen.  
Specify a node address on a Data Link Table Screen to display the Data Link  
Table Screen for that node. If there are more than 16 nodes registered on one  
Data Link Table Screen, use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll up or down as  
required.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Setting Data Link Tables  
Perform the following procedure to set a data link table on the Data Link Table  
Screen.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Specify the link start words for areas 1 and 2.  
2. Specify the address of the node from which to receive data.  
3. Specify the number of words to be received (Num Wd).  
4. Repeat steps 2. and 3. for each node that is to participate in the data links.  
1.  
Link start word  
Area 1 of node 1  
Area 1 of node 2  
Node 2  
3.  
3.  
2.  
No. of  
words  
2.  
Node 2  
Node 3  
Area 1 of node 3  
Node 3  
Link word  
Link word  
No. of  
words  
3.  
1.  
Node model specified  
in Device Info set”  
: Can be set  
: Automatically displayed  
2.  
If the data link table for the  
node at the cursor position  
has been set, the link source  
word will be automatically  
displayed. If it has not been  
set, nothing will be displayed.  
The first word for each node is  
automatically displayed.  
If the data link table for the remote node  
has been set, the link source word will  
be automatically displayed. If it has not  
been set, nothing will be displayed. The  
send area for the local node is  
displayed as Send area.”  
Note Items that can be input on the screen are displayed in green.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Setting Example  
The following is an example of data link areas and the corresponding data link  
tables.  
Area 1 of node 1  
Area 1 of node 2  
Area 1 of node 3  
Node 1  
(15 words)  
Node 2  
(20 words)  
Node 3  
(30 words)  
Node 2  
(20 words)  
Node 3  
(30 words)  
Node 1  
(15 words)  
Node 3  
(30 words)  
Node 2  
(20 words)  
Node 1  
(15 words)  
Receive area  
Send area  
Data Link Table for Node 1  
Data Link Table for Node 2  
Data Link Table for Node 3  
Data Link Status  
When data link status is to be used, specify in the Status Wordfield the first  
word of the area in which data link status is to be stored.  
Example: To store data link status in DM 01000 to DM 01015 set the first status  
word to D01000.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Data Link Setting Forms  
Before setting data link tables with the Controller Link Support Software, you  
must determine how data is to be sent and received. Make an enlarged copy of  
the Data Link Setting Forms provided in Appendix E and use them to design the  
data link.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Use Setting Form 1 to determine the data to be sent and received.  
Date  
___/___/___  
Comments:  
Controller Link Support Software  
Data Link Setting Form1  
System  
Drawing No.  
Node  
1
Node  
2
Node  
3
Node  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Link start  
word  
Link start  
word  
Link start  
word  
Link start  
word  
Offset  
B
00100  
00215  
00150  
Line A errors,  
#1, 15 wds  
Line A errors,  
#1, 15 wds  
Line A errors,  
#1, 15 wds  
00225  
10  
00115  
00165  
Line B errors,  
#2, 30 wds  
Line B errors,  
#2, 30 wds  
Line B errors,  
#2, 20 wds  
20  
00135  
00149  
Line C errors,  
#3, 15 wds  
00254  
00195  
00209  
Line C errors,  
#3, 15 wds  
2. Use Setting Form 2 to enter the values to be set in the data link table.  
3. Enter the values in the Controller Link Support Software.  
___/___/___  
Comments:  
Date  
Controller Link Support Software  
Data Link Setting Form 2  
System  
Drawing No.  
1
Node  
Area: 1  
Node  
Area: 1  
2
2
2
Link start word 00100  
Link start word  
00215  
Start word  
at local  
node  
Start word  
at local  
node  
Send/  
Source Number  
Offset  
Source Number  
node of words  
Send/  
Offset  
Data  
Data  
Receive  
node  
of words  
15  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Send/  
#
Line A errors  
00100  
Line A errors  
Line B errors  
#
1
10  
30  
5
00215  
Receive  
Send/  
#
#
2
3
Line B errors  
Line C errors  
00115  
00135  
20  
15  
10  
0
00225  
#
#
#
#
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Receive  
#
#
Automatically  
displayed  
Automatically  
displayed  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Offsets  
Offsets can be set by pressing the F6 (Offset) Key to display the Offsetcolumn  
in the table. Offsets do not need to be set unless they are required.  
In the Offsetcolumn, specify the offset for each reception node.  
Setting Example  
The following is an example of data link areas and the corresponding data link  
tables.  
Area 1 of Node 1  
Area 1 of Node 2  
Area 1 of Node 3  
Node 1  
(10 words)  
Node 1  
(15 words)  
Node 1  
(15 words)  
Node 2  
(30 words)  
Node 2  
(20 words)  
Node 2  
(30 words)  
Node 3  
(15 words)  
Node 3  
(15 words)  
Receive area  
Send area  
Data Link Table for Node 1  
Data Link Table for Node 2  
Data Link Table for Node 3  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
5-3-2 Setting Data Link Tables  
Perform the following procedures to create and transfer data link tables.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Edit tableon page 52.  
2. Check tableon page 61.  
3. Transfer tableon page 67.  
When necessary, use Save tableand Retrieve tableto save and retrieve data  
link tables to/from files.  
Note 1) Data link table data created or edited with the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware is recorded in the memory of the computer. The data will be lost when  
the Controller Link Support Software is exited. To avoid this, use Save  
tableto save the data created or edited with Edit table.”  
2) If data link tables have already been saved or transferred, the following pro-  
cedures can be used to read the tables to the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware and edit them again.  
Retrieve tableon page 66.  
Controller Link Computerunder the Transfer Table Menu on page 67.  
5-3-3 Displaying the Data Link Menu  
To create or edit a data link table or manage a data link, select the corresponding  
function from the Data Link Menu. Each function is described on the following  
pages. The following procedure shows how to display the Data Link Menu.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select L: Data Linkfrom the Main Menu. The Node Information Screen will  
be displayed.  
2. Press the F2 (Menu) Key. The Data Link Menu will be displayed.  
5-3-4 Creating and Editing Data Link Tables E: Edit Table  
E: Edit Tableis used to create or edit data link tables.  
Note 1) E: Edit Tablecreates or edits data link tables in the computer memory. To  
actually set the data link table at a node, select T: Transfer tablefrom the  
Data Link Menu. Also, save the data link tables as a file by selecting  
S: Save tablefrom the Data Link Menu. Otherwise, the table data will be  
cleared when the Controller Link Support Software is exited.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
2) The Controller Link Support Software allows you to edit data link tables for  
all nodes within the network at the same time.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select L: Data Linkfrom the Main Menu. The Node Information Screen will  
be displayed.  
The meaning of each display item is as follows:  
Item  
Meaning  
Number of Nodes Displays the number of send and receive areas (number of  
nodes) specified in the data link table for each node.  
Area 1 Link Wd  
Displays the total number of words in the data link area 1  
for each node.  
Area 2 Link Wd  
Displays the total number of words in the data link area 2  
for each node.  
These items are not displayed for a node for which a data link table has not  
been set.  
Press the F3 (Delete) Key or the Delete Key to delete the data link table for  
the node in the cursor position. When either of these keys is pressed, a con-  
firmation message will appear at the bottom of the screen. To delete the data  
link table, press Yand then the Enter Key. To cancel the delete processing,  
press Nand then the Enter Key.  
Press the F4 Key (Pre Pg), F5 Key (Nxt Pg), Page Up Key, or Page Down  
Key to switch between the screen for nodes 1 to 31 and the screen for nodes  
33 to 62.  
Data link areas similar to automatically set areas can be easily created by  
pressing the F6 (Set All) Key. See page 56 for details.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
2. Select the node for which a data link table is to be created or edited. Use the  
Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the node, then press the Enter Key. The  
Data Link Table Screen for the specified node will be displayed.  
The functions of the Function Keys differ depending on whether the cursor is  
in a word address input field or in other input fields.  
The following Function Keys appear when the cursor is in a word address  
input field  
The following Function Keys appear when the cursor is in other input fields  
The screen can be switched to the Data Link Table Screen for a specified  
node by moving the cursor to the Nodefield on the upper left of the screen  
and entering the node address.  
Key  
F3 (Delete)  
F4 (Insert)  
Function  
Deletes the line on which the cursor is positioned.  
Inserts one line before the line on which the cursor is  
positioned. The newly inserted line is for a node with the  
next smallest unspecified address.  
F6 (Offset)  
F7 (Clear)  
Switches between the offset display mode and no offset  
display mode. If an attempt is made to switch the mode  
when offset data has already been entered, a  
confirmation message will be displayed.  
Press Yand then the Enter Key to set all the offsets to 0  
and removes the offset displays. To cancel the operation,  
press Nand then the Enter Key.  
Clears all the data link tables that are currently displayed.  
When the F7 (Clear) Key is pressed, a confirmation  
message will be displayed.  
To clear the tables, press Yand then the Enter Key. To  
cancel the operation, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
F8 (Pre Nd)  
F9 (Nxt Nd)  
Displays the Data Link Table Screen for the previous  
node.  
Displays the Data Link Table Screen for the next node.  
3. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to each field in the data link table  
and enter appropriate data.  
In the Data Link Table Screens, up to 16 lines can be displayed simulta-  
neously. When setting 17 lines or more, the screen will automatically scroll.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
If 17 or more lines have been set, the screen will automatically scroll up  
(down) if the Page Up (Down) Key is pressed with the cursor in the top (bot-  
tom) line of the Nodeor Num Wdcolumn.  
To specify the data area, use the F3 (CIO/IR), F4 (LR), F5 (DM ), or F6 (EM)  
Key.  
Press “–” or the Delete Key in the first status word field to set the default val-  
ue. Use Numeric Keys to enter numeric values.  
The setting range for each item is as follows:  
Item  
CS1-series PCs  
1 to 62  
C200HX/HG/HE  
PCs  
CVM1 and  
CV-series PCs  
CQM1H PCs  
IBM PC/AT  
(see note a)  
Node  
Link start  
word  
CIO: 0000 to 6143 CIO: 000 to 235,  
CIO: 0000 to 2555 CIO: 0000 to 247  
CIO: 00000 to  
65534  
300 to 511  
LR: 000 to 199  
LR: 000 to 199  
(see note c)  
LR: 00 to 63  
(see note c)  
LR: 00 to 63  
LR: 00000 to  
65534  
DM: 0000 to 5999  
(see note d)  
DM: 00000 to  
DM: 0000 to 5999 DM: 00000 to  
32767  
(see note d)  
(see note d)  
24575  
(see note d)  
DM: 00000 to  
65534  
EM: 0000 to 6143  
(see note d)  
EM (banks 0 to  
15):  
EM (banks 0 to  
12):  
EM (banks 0 to  
7):  
EM (banks 0 to 15):  
00000 to  
0000 to 6143  
00000 to  
32767  
(see note d)  
00000 to  
32765  
65534  
(see note d)  
(see note d)  
No. of  
000 to 1000  
words  
(Num Wd)  
Offset  
000 to 999  
Status word CIO: 0001 to 6128 CIO: 001 to 220,  
CIO: 0001 to 2540 CIO: 00000 to  
CIO: 00000 to  
65534  
300 to 496  
65534  
LR: 000 to 184  
LR: 000 to 184  
(see note c)  
LR: 00 to 48  
(see note c)  
LR: 00000 to  
65534  
LR: 00000 to  
65534  
DM: 00000 to  
DM: 0000 to 5984 DM: 00000 to  
32752  
(see note d)  
(see note d)  
24560  
(see note d)  
DM: 00000 to  
65534  
DM: 00000 to  
65534  
EM (Banks 0 to  
15):  
EM (banks 0 to  
12):  
EM (banks 0 to 7): EM (banks 0 to 15): EM (banks 0 to 15):  
0000 to 6128  
00000 to  
00000 to  
00000 to  
00000 to  
32752  
(see note d)  
32750  
(see note d)  
65534  
65534  
(see note d)  
Note a) Because IBM PC/AT or compatible computers have no data  
areas, it is meaningless to specify first status words and link start  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
words for areas 1 and 2.The data link area always starts from the  
beginning of the specified area, and data link status cannot be  
read using functions or driver call. Computers do not have a spe-  
cific areas.  
b) In Wired Controller Link Networks, node addresses can only be  
set in the range 1 to 32. The same restriction applies to Controller  
Link Networks that consist only of Optical Controller Link Units  
(with CLK11 at the end of the model number), or that consist of  
both Optical Controller Link Units and Optical Ring Controller Link  
Units (with CLK12 at the end of the model number). Node  
addresses 1 to 62 can only be used in Controller LInk Networks  
that consist of Optical Ring Controller Link Units only.  
c) If a start word address is specified between LR 000 and LR 199 for  
a CS1-series, CVM1, or CV-series PC, it will be allocated to the  
CIO1000 to CIO1199.  
d) The number of DM words and the number of EM banks differ ac-  
cording to the CPU Unit model used. Refer to the PC operation or  
programming manual for details.  
Creating Simple Data  
Link Areas Set All  
Set Allcan be used to simply create data link areas similar to automatically set  
data link areas. An example is shown below.  
Area 1  
Start word  
Same size  
Area 2  
Start word  
Same size  
After Set Allis performed, highly flexible data link tables can be quickly created  
by changing the link start word addresses, the number of send words, and the  
number of receive words for each node.  
With automatically set data links, only limited areas can be used for areas 1 and  
2. With Set All,however, data areas can be freely selected for link areas 1  
and 2.  
With automatically set data links, data links must use the automatically created  
data link areas. With Set All,the link start word, the number of send words, and  
the number of receive words can be freely changed for each node later.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Differences  
Data area  
Set All”  
Can be freely selected for both Area 1: CIO (IR)  
areas 1 and 2. Area 2: DM or EM  
Automatic setting  
Link start word in  
areas 1 and 2  
Can be freely specified for each area (this is the same for all  
nodes).  
Can be changed for each node Cannot be changed later.  
later.  
Send area size  
for each node  
Same size for each area  
Can be changed for each node Cannot be changed later.  
later.  
Receive-only  
nodes  
Cannot be specified.  
Cannot be specified by default.  
Can be specified by changing  
the data link area later.  
Send-only nodes  
Cannot be specified.  
Cannot be specified by default.  
Can be specified by changing  
the data link area later.  
Node sequence  
for data link  
areas  
Automatically determined (ascending order)  
Can be changed later by  
Cannot be changed later.  
deleting or inserting nodes.  
Data link status  
words  
Can be specified in CIO (IR),  
DM, or EM.  
Can be specified only in CIO  
(IR).  
Press the F6 (Set All) Key at the Node Information Screen to display the follow-  
ing window.  
The items are almost the same as the items that are set in the DM parameter  
area for automatic setting.  
Item  
Meaning  
Area 1 Link Start Word  
Specify the first word address of area 1.  
Area 1 Link Word  
Number  
Specify the number of words in the send area in each  
node in area 1.  
Area 2 Link Start Word  
Specify the first word address for area 2.  
Area 2 Link Word  
Number  
Specify the number of words in the send area in each  
node in area 2.  
Status Word  
Specify the first word of the words in which data link  
status is to be stored.  
The setting range for each item is as follows:  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Item  
CS1-series PC  
C200HX/HG/ HE  
PC  
CVM1 or  
CV-series PC  
CQM1-series PC  
IBM PC/AT  
(see note a)  
Nodes in data  
links  
1 to 62  
CIO: 0000 to  
6143  
CIO: 000 to 235,  
300 to 511  
CIO: 0000 to  
2555  
CIO: 0000 to 247 CIO: 00000 to  
Area 1 Link Start  
Word  
65534  
LR: 00 to 63  
LR: 000 to 199  
(see note c)  
LR: 00 to 63  
LR: 000 to 199  
(see note c)  
LR: 00000 to  
DM: 0000 to  
65534  
DM: 0000 to  
5999  
5999  
DM: 00000 to  
32767  
DM: 00000 to  
24575  
(see note d) DM: 00000 to  
(see note d)  
65534  
EM: 0000 to  
Area 2 Link Start  
Word  
(see note d)  
(see note d)  
EM (banks 0 to  
15):  
6143  
(see note d)  
EM (banks 0 to  
15):  
EM (banks 0 to  
12):  
EM (banks 0 to  
7):  
0000 to  
6143  
(see note d)  
00000 to  
65534  
00000 to  
32767  
00000 to  
32765  
(see note d)  
(see note d)  
000 to 1000  
Area 1 Link Word  
Number  
Area 2 Link Word  
Number  
Status Word  
CIO: 0001 to  
6128  
CIO: 001 to 220,  
300 to 496  
CIO: 0001 to  
2540  
CIO: 00000 to  
65534  
CIO: 00000 to  
65534  
LR: 000 to 184  
(see note c)  
LR: 00 to 48  
LR: 000 to 184  
(see note c)  
LR: 00000 to  
65534  
LR: 00000 to  
65534  
DM: 0000 to  
5984  
DM: 00000 to  
32752  
DM: 00000 to  
24560  
DM: 00000 to  
65534  
(see note d)  
DM: 00000 to  
65534  
(see note d)  
(see note d)  
EM (Banks 0 to  
15):  
EM (banks 0 to  
15):  
EM (banks 0 to  
12):  
EM (banks 0 to  
7):  
EM (banks 0 to  
15):  
0000 to  
6128  
(see note d)  
00000 to  
65534  
00000 to  
32752  
(see note d)  
00000 to  
32750  
(see note d)  
00000 to  
65534  
Note a) Because IBM PC/AT or compatible computers have no data  
areas, it is meaningless to specify first status words and link start  
words for areas 1 and 2.The data link area always starts from the  
beginning of the specified area, and data link status cannot be  
read using functions or driver call. Computers do not have a spe-  
cific areas.  
b) In Wired Controller Link Networks, node addresses can only be  
set in the range 1 to 32. The same restriction applies to Controller  
Link Networks that consist only of Optical Controller Link Units  
(with CLK11 at the end of the model number), or that consist of  
both Optical Controller Link Units and Optical Ring Controller Link  
Units (with CLK12 at the end of the model number). Node  
addresses 1 to 62 can only be used in Controller LInk Networks  
that consist of Optical Ring Controller Link Units only.  
c) If a start word address is specified between LR 000 and LR 199 for  
a CS1-series, CVM1, or CV-series PC, it will be allocated to the  
CIO1000 to CIO1199.  
d) The number of DM words and the number of EM banks differ ac-  
cording to the CPU Unit model used. Refer to the PC operation or  
programming manual for details.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
After the necessary items have been specified, press the F7 (Execute) Key to  
display the following window in which the nodes to participate in the data link can  
be selected.  
Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the nodes to participate in the data  
links, then press the Enter Key. Yeswill be displayed. An unmarked node will  
not participate in the data links. Press the Enter Key at a node marked with Yes”  
to erase the Yes.”  
Press the F6 (Execute) Key to display the following window to prompt you to  
specify whether the data link tables for the nodes not participating in the data  
links are to be cleared or retained.  
Press Yand then the Enter Key to erase the data link tables for the nodes not  
participating in the data links and create data link areas (similar to the one for  
automatically set data links) at each node participating in the data links.  
Press Nand then the Enter Key to retain the data link tables for the nodes not  
participating in the data links and create data link areas (similar to the one for  
automatically set data links) at each node participating in the data links.  
Press the Escape Key to cancel the execution and return to the Node Informa-  
tion Screen. The execution can also be canceled by pressing the F1 (Menu) Key,  
the F2 (Menu) Key, or the F10 (End) Key. The following screens are displayed  
when these keys are pressed.  
F1: Main Menu  
F2: Data Link Menu  
F10: Node Information Screen  
5-3-5 Copying Data Link Tables Y: Copy Table  
Y: Copy tableis used to copy a data link table for one node to other nodes.  
When a similar data link area is to be used for other nodes, the data link table for  
each node can be easily created by copying the original data link table and then  
making changes.  
Note 1) Once this copy function is executed, the existing data link table at the des-  
tination node will be lost. Be sure to check table data at the destination node  
before executing the function.  
2) Y: Copy tablecopies data link tables in the computer memory. To actually  
set the data link table for a node, select T: Transfer tablefrom the Data Link  
Menu. Also, save the data link tables as a file by selecting S: Save table”  
from the Data Link Menu. Otherwise, the table data will be cleared when the  
Controller Link Support Software is exited.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
3) Executing Y: Copy tablealso changes the node model specified in Device  
Info setat the destination node to the same node model as the source node.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select Y: Copy tablefrom the Data Link Menu.  
2. Specify the source node address. Specify the node address with Numeric  
Keys, then press the Enter Key. Any number between 1 and 62 can be speci-  
fied.  
If the number of nodes set in the data link table for the specified node is 0, an  
error message will be displayed.  
The following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify the destina-  
tion node address.  
3. Specify the destination node address. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cur-  
sor to the copy destination node address, then press the Enter Key. Yes”  
will be displayed to represent the copy destination.  
To deselect the copy destination node (or erase Yes), move the cursor to  
the node address marked with Yes,then press the Enter Key again. Yes”  
will be erased to deselect the copy destination node.  
4. After specifying all destination nodes, press the F6 (Execute) Key. The data  
link tables will be copied.  
5-3-6 Initializing All Data Link Tables C: Initialize Table  
C: Initialize tableis used to initialize all data link tables.  
When data link tables are to be created from scratch, initialize the data link tables  
for all nodes before beginning.  
Note 1) C: Initialize tableinitializes the data link tables in the computer memory.  
2) Executing initializes the data link tables for all nodes. Initialization proces-  
sing sets the Link start wordfield of area 1 to 00000, the Link start word”  
field of area 2 to D00000, and other settings to defaults.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select C: Initialize tablefrom the Data Link Menu.  
2. Press Yand then the Enter Key. The data link tables for all nodes will be  
initialized.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
To cancel the initialization processing, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
5-3-7 Checking Data Link Tables K: Check Table  
K: Check tableis used to check data link tables for errors or inconsistencies. It  
can also check for inconsistencies between the data link tables for multiple  
nodes.  
If errors are detected, correct the data link tables as described in Error Mes-  
sages (on page 63).  
Note 1) Before executing K: Check table,always select I: Device Info Setfrom  
the Data Link Menu and specify the PC models.  
2) K: Check tablechecks the data link tables in the computer memory. To  
check the data link table that has been set for a node, use T: Transfer table”  
on the Data Link Menu to read the table to the computer, then execute  
K: Check table.”  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select K: Check tablefrom the Data Link Menu. If the number of nodes set  
in all data link tables is 0, an error message will be displayed.  
The following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify the check  
level.  
2. Select the error level to be checked. The following window will be displayed  
to prompt you to specify the nodes to be checked.  
When the window appears, each node will be displayed as shown as fol-  
lows, depending on the number of nodes set in the data link table in the  
memory:  
Nodes for which the number of nodes is not 0: YES (checked)  
Nodes for which the number of nodes is 0:  
No display (not checked)  
Error level  
Meaning  
Indicates serious errors.  
Rank A (error)  
If this level of error is detected, the data links will not  
execute normally.  
Rank B (warning)  
Indicates minor errors or the locations of settings that  
could be faulty.  
Even if this level of error is detected, the data links will  
execute, but may result in unexpected operation. The  
settings should be checked.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
3. Specify the nodes to be checked. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to  
the node to be checked, then press the Enter Key. Yeswill be displayed to  
represent the nodes to be checked.  
To deselect a node to be checked, move the cursor to a node marked with  
Yes,then press the Enter Key again. Yeswill be erased to deselect the  
node.  
4. After specifying all the nodes to be checked, press the F6 (Execute) Key.  
The data link tables will be checked and the check results screen will be dis-  
played.  
Each error level is indicated by a different character color as follows:  
Red: Error  
White: Warning  
A message is displayed in the lower part of the screen according to the  
check results as follows:  
When no errors has been detected: Check OK”  
When errors are continued on the next page: Continue”  
When the current page is the last page of the error display: Last page”  
5. When errors are displayed on multiple screens, use the following keys to  
switch the screen and display the check results. F4 (Pre Pg), F5 (Nxt Pg), F8  
(Pre Node), F9 (Nxt Node), Page Up, and Page Down  
6. After confirming the check results, press the F10 (End) Key.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Error Messages  
The following table lists the error messages that are displayed on the check re-  
sults screen. After confirming the check results, use E: Edit tableto correct the  
data link tables, then check the data link tables again.  
Errors  
Message  
Meaning  
Action  
Insufficient Status  
area  
There are too few words in  
the data area for the data link so that data link status (16  
Change the first status word  
status.  
words) can be stored in the  
area.  
Table Data error  
The first status word is  
outside the allowable range.  
(see note)  
Correct the values within the  
allowable range as shown in  
the table on page 55.  
The link start word address of  
area 1 is outside the  
allowable range. (see note)  
The number of registered  
nodes exceeds 62.  
The node address is 0 or  
more than 62.  
There is a node for which the  
send area or receive area for  
one node exceeds 1,000  
words.  
An offset exceeds 999.  
An offset for the send area of  
the local node is not 0.  
Duplicate Node  
address  
The same node address is  
set more than once in the  
data link table.  
Correct the duplicate node  
address.  
Link word number  
over  
There is a node for which the Change the total number of  
total number of words in the  
send areas of areas 1 and 2  
exceeds 1,000.  
words in the send areas of  
areas 1 and 2 to 1,000 or  
less.  
Too many words in The total number of words in Reduce the total number of  
data link  
the data link areas of areas 1 words in the data link areas of  
and 2 exceeds the maximum areas 1 and 2 to the  
allowable number of words for maximum allowable number  
the following PCs.  
CS1-series PCs: 12,000  
words  
of words for the following PCs  
or less.  
CS1-series PCs: 12,000  
words  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs: 8,000  
words  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs: 8,000  
words  
CVM1 and CV-series PCs:  
CQM1H PCs: 8,000 words  
CVM1 and CV-series PCs:  
8,000 words  
8,000 words  
IBM PC/AT: 32,000 words  
IBM PC/AT: 32,000 words  
Link area overlap  
error  
The same data area is  
specified for areas 1 and 2.  
Change the link start and first  
status word of areas 1 and 2  
so that the data link area and  
the data link status words do  
not overlap each other.  
The data link status words  
overlap with a data link area.  
Insufficient Link  
area  
There are not enough words  
for the data link area.  
Correct the data link area  
within the allowable range.  
(Area 1/ Area 2)  
Link word number  
0 error  
The total number of link  
words for one node is set to  
0.  
Set the number of link words  
for area 1 or 2.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Note Range checks are performed according to the model specified in  
Device Info set.For C200HX/HG/HE PCs, no error will occur even if  
a word address between CIO 236 and CIO 299, which are the outside  
the allowable range, is specified. However, when the data link table is  
transferred (or written) to the node, an error will occur. Use the Data  
Link Table Edit Screen to check the word addresses.  
Warnings  
Message  
Meaning  
Action  
Recv area remain  
(Area 1/ Area 2)  
(see note a)  
The number of words in the  
receive area is greater than  
that in the send area.  
Check the number of link  
words. If free space is  
intentionally left in the receive  
area, the data link can be  
executed without having to  
make any changes.  
Recv area short  
(Area 1/ Area 2)  
(see note b)  
The number of words in the  
receive area is fewer than  
that in the send area.  
Check the number of link  
words. If only part of data in  
the send area is to be  
received, the data link can be  
executed without having to  
make any changes.  
Invalid offset  
(Area 1/ Area 2)  
The specified offset is outside Check the offset. The data  
the send area.  
link can be executed, but no  
data can be received.  
Source node has  
no send data  
A send area has not been set Change the reception node or  
for a node from which data  
set a send area for that node.  
reception has been specified.  
Source node has  
no table  
A data link table has not been Change the reception node or  
set at the node from which  
data reception has been  
specified.  
set the data link table for that  
node.  
Note a) Message Receive area remainwill be displayed when the num-  
ber of send words and the receive area are as shown in the follow-  
ing illustration.  
Remaining  
Not remaining  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Data indicated by  
is received in node 2 and the  
remaining words are cleared.  
Send  
area  
Send  
area  
Receive  
area  
Receive  
area  
Data indicated by  
is received in node 2.  
b) Message Receive area shortwill be displayed when the number  
of send words and the receive area are as shown in the following  
illustration.  
Sufficient (not short)  
Insufficient (short)  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Node 1  
Node 2  
Receive  
area  
Send  
area  
Send  
area  
Receive  
area  
Data indicated by  
cannot be received in node 2.  
Data indicated by  
is received in node 2.  
Data indicated by  
is received  
and the remaining data is truncated.  
5-3-8 Saving Data Link Tables as a File S: Save Table  
S: Save tableis used to save all data link tables as a file.  
With Controller Link Support Software Ver. 2.00, data link tables can be saved in  
the file formats shown below.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Format  
Extension  
Saving supported  
Controller Link Support  
Software Ver. 2.00  
.CL2  
.CLK  
.CL3  
Yes  
Controller Link Support  
Software Ver. 1.10  
Yes (see note 1)  
No  
CX-Net on  
CX-Programmer  
Note 1) Data link tables containing node addresses in the range 33 to 62 cannot be  
saved with Controller Link Support Software Ver. 1.10.  
2) Unless saved, all data link tables in the memory will be lost wen the Control-  
ler Link Support Software is exited.  
3) If data link tables have been modified but have not yet been saved, a con-  
firmation message will be displayed when you attempt to exit the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
4) S: Save tablesaves the data link tables in the computer memory. To save  
the data link tables that have already been set at nodes, select T: Transfer  
tablefrom the Data Link Menu to read the data link tables to the computer,  
then save the tables.  
5) Data link table files for the Controller Link Support Software are not compat-  
ible with those for the conventional SYSMAC LINK Support Utility.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select S: Save tablefrom the Data Link Menu.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) to be saved. Enter the file  
name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
Use the extension .CL2 for files to be saved in Ver. 2.00 format, and use the  
extension .CLK for files to be saved in Ver. 1.10 format. (If an attempt to save  
a file containing node addresses 33 to 62 is made with the extension .CLK,  
an error will be generated.) If the extension is omitted by the user, it will be  
added automatically depending on the node addresses used, in the follow-  
ing way.  
If node addresses 33 to 62 are used: .CL2.  
If node addresses 33 to 62 are not used: .CLK.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in System setup”  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen. (The extension can be changed  
after the file is selected.)  
If an existing file name is specified, a confirmation message will be dis-  
played to ask you to check whether the file can be overwritten. Press Yto  
overwrite the file or press Nto cancel the save processing, then press the  
Enter Key.  
3. Enter a title for the file.  
Enter the title with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key. Up to 30  
characters can be entered. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete Keys can be  
used to correct the characters.  
If no title is required, just press the Enter Key.  
The file will be saved.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
5-3-9 Reading Data Link Tables from a File L: Retrieve Table  
L: Retrieve tableis used to read data link tables from a file into computer  
memory.  
With Controller Link Support Software Ver. 2.00, data link tables can be saved in  
the file formats shown below.  
Format  
Extension  
Reading supported  
Yes  
Controller Link Support  
Software Ver. 2.00  
.CL2  
.CLK  
.CL3  
Controller Link Support  
Software Ver. 1.10  
Yes  
CX-Net on  
Yes (see note 1)  
CX-Programmer  
Note Data link tables in CX-Net format can be read but not saved.  
There are differences in PC model information between the Controller Link Sup-  
port Software and the CX-Net. Therefore, when reading CX-Net format files with  
Controller Link Support Software, the data will be converted in the way shown in  
the following table. When performing operations where a high degree of preci-  
sion is required, such as when checking data link tables, reset as necessary.  
Model information in CX-Net on  
CX-Programmer  
Model information in Controller LInk  
Support Software  
No specification  
C200HE  
C200HG  
C200HX  
CVM1  
No specification  
C200HE(-Z)  
C200HG(-Z)  
C200HX  
CVM1-CPU21  
CV2000  
CV2000  
CV1000  
CV500  
CV1000  
CV500  
NSB  
CLK Board  
CS1G-45  
CS1G  
CS1H  
CS1H-67  
CVM1-V2  
C200HX-Z  
C00HG-Z  
C200HE-Z  
IDSC  
CVM1-CPU21  
C200HX-85Z  
C200HG(-Z)  
C200HE(-Z)  
No specification  
Note 1) If data link tables are read from a file, the current data link tables in the  
memory will be lost.  
2) If data link tables in the memory have been modified, a confirmation window  
will be displayed when you attempt to read data link tables from the file.  
3) Data link table files for the Controller Link Support Software are not compat-  
ible with those for the SYSMAC LINK Support Utility.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select L: Retrieve tablefrom the Data Link Menu. If data link tables in the  
memory have been modified, a confirmation window will be displayed.  
Press Yto continue or press Nto cancel the process, and then press the  
Enter Key. If data link tables in the memory have not been modified or Yis  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
pressed to continue, the following window will be displayed to prompt you to  
specify a file name.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) to be read. Enter the file name  
with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
When reading files, specify the extension .CL2 for Ver. 2.00 format files,  
.CLK for Ver. 1.10 format files, or .CL3 for CX-Net format files. If an extension  
is not specified, a search for the specified file-name in the specified directory  
will be made and if a corresponding file is found it will be read. If more than  
one file of the same name is found then priority will be in the following order:  
1. .CLK (Ver. 1.10 format)  
2. .CL2 (Ver. 2.00 format)  
3. .CL3 (CX-Net format)  
For example, if two files with the same name are found, and one of the files  
has the extension .CLK and the other one has the extension .CL2, the one  
with the .CLK will be read.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in System setup”  
will be displayed as the source directory. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
The file will be read.  
5-3-10 Transferring Data Link Tables T: Transfer Table  
T: Transfer tableis used to transfer data link tables between nodes and the  
computer as follows:  
Item  
Function  
Page  
R: Controller Link Computer Reads the data link tables set at  
67  
nodes to the computer memory.  
W: Computer Controller Link Writes the data link tables from the 69  
computer memory to nodes for  
registration.  
V: Compare  
Compares the data link tables set  
at nodes with the data link tables in  
the computer memory.  
71  
Displaying the Transfer  
Data Link Table Menu  
Select T: Transfer tablefrom the Data Link Menu. The Transfer Data Link table  
Menu will be displayed.  
Reading Data Link Tables  
from Nodes —  
R: Controller Link Computeris used to read the data link tables at nodes into  
the computer memory.  
R: Controller Link →  
Note If data link tables are read from nodes, the current data link tables in the comput-  
er memory will be lost. If data link tables in the memory have been modified, a  
confirmation window will be displayed when you attempt to read data link tables  
from the nodes. To save the data link tables in the memory, select S: Save table”  
from the Data Link Menu to save them as a file.  
Computer  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select R: Controller Link Computerfrom the Transfer Data Link table  
Menu. If data link tables in the memory have been modified, a confirmation  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
window will be displayed. Press Yto continue or press Nto cancel the  
process, then press the Enter Key. If data link tables in the memory have not  
been modified or Yis pressed to continue, the following window will be dis-  
played to prompt you to specify the target nodes.  
2. Specify the address of the Controller Link Network containing the nodes  
from which data link tables are to be read. Enter the network address with  
Numeric Keys, then press the Enter Key. When the Enter Key is pressed, the  
nodes on the specified network will be checked and displayed in ascending  
order of node address.  
When node addresses are displayed, all nodes will be marked with YES,  
which represents the target nodes for reading.  
3. Specify the nodes that are to be excluded from read processing. Use the  
Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the nodes to be excluded from reading,  
then press the Enter Key. YES will be erased to deselect the node. To rese-  
lect a node for reading, move the cursor to the node unmarked with YES,  
then press the Enter Key again. YES will be displayed to reselect the node.  
4. After specifying all the target nodes for reading, press the F6 (Execute) Key.  
The transfer results screen will be displayed and data link table read proces-  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
sing will start. Data link tables will be read in ascending order of node ad-  
dress.  
To cancel the read processing, press the F9 (Cancel) Key.  
During read processing, Waitwill be displayed in the lower part of the  
screen and the progress of processing will be displayed for each node.  
When read processing for all the specified nodes is completed, Endwill be  
displayed in the lower part of the screen.  
5. Then, press the F10 (End) Key.  
Writing Data Link Tables  
to Nodes W: Computer  
Controller Link  
W: Computer Controller Linkis used to write the data link tables from the  
computer memory to nodes.  
Note 1) If data link tables are written to nodes, the existing data link tables set at the  
nodes will be lost. In this case, a confirmation message for overwriting will  
not be displayed even if data link tables have already been set at the nodes.  
Therefore, carefully check the contents of the data link tables set at the  
nodes before transferring new data link tables.  
When writing data to the CS1-series PC, be sure to set pin 1 of the CPU  
Units DIP switch to OFF.  
2) When writing data link tables to a CVM1 or CV-series PC, always set the  
system protect key switch on the CPU Unit to NORMAL.  
3) W: Computer Controller Linkcan also be used to delete the data link  
tables for the nodes that are not participating in the data link. Always delete  
unused data link tables.  
4) Data link tables can be written to nodes only when the nodes are not partici-  
pating in active data links or when the data links are inactive.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select W: Computer Controller Linkfrom the Transfer Data Link table  
Menu. The following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify the  
target nodes.  
2. Specify the address of the Controller Link Network containing the nodes to  
which data link tables are to be written. Enter the network address with Nu-  
meric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
When the Enter Key is pressed, the nodes on the specified network will be  
checked and displayed in ascending order of node address.  
When node addresses are displayed, Yes or No will be displayed as follows,  
depending on the number of nodes set in the data link table in the memory:  
Nodes for which the number of nodes is not 0: Yes (data link tables written)  
Nodes for which the number of nodes is 0: No (data link tables removed)  
3. Specify the processing for each node. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cur-  
sor to the node, then press the Enter Key. Each time the Enter Key is  
pressed, the display will change in the following order.  
Yes (data link tables written)  
No (data link tables removed)  
No display (nothing done, i.e., data link tables not transferred nor removed)  
Yes (data link tables written)  
4. After specifying the processing for each node, press the F6 (Execute) Key.  
The transfer results screen will be displayed and data link tables will be writ-  
ten or removed as specified.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
The processing will be performed in ascending order of node address.  
To cancel the processing, press the F9 (Cancel) Key.  
During the processing, Waitwill be displayed in the lower part of the screen  
and the progress of processing will be displayed for each node.  
In write processing, each data link table will be simultaneously checked for  
serious errors or link offset errors. If an error is detected in a data link table, a  
window will be displayed to ask you to determine whether the data is to be  
written to the node. Press Yto write the data or press Nto cancel the write  
processing, and then press the Enter Key. If Nis pressed to cancel the  
write processing, Canceled due to table errorwill be displayed at the node  
address.  
When processing for all the specified nodes is completed, Endwill be dis-  
played at the lower part of the screen.  
5. Then, press the F10 (End) Key.  
Comparing Data Link  
Tables V: Compare  
V: Compareis used to compare data link tables in the computer memory with  
data link tables set at each node.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select V: Comparefrom the Transfer Data Link Table Menu. The following  
window will be displayed to prompt you to specify the nodes for which data  
link tables are to be compared with those in the memory.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
2. Specify the address of the Controller Link Network containing the nodes for  
which data link tables are to be compared. Enter the network address with  
Numeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
When the Enter Key is pressed, the software will check the nodes on the  
specified network and display only the nodes that exist in the network and  
for which the number of nodes specified in the data link table in the memory  
is not 0. These nodes will be displayed in ascending order of node address.  
When node addresses are displayed, YES will be displayed at each node  
address to represent the target nodes for comparison.  
3. Select the nodes to be excluded from comparison. Use the Cursor Keys to  
move the cursor to the node to be excluded from comparison, then press the  
Enter Key. YES will be erased to deselect the node.  
To reselect a node for comparison, move the cursor to the node unmarked  
with YES, then press the Enter Key again. YES will be displayed to reselect  
the node.  
4. After specifying all the target nodes for comparison, press the F6 (Execute)  
Key. The transfer results screen will be displayed and data link table com-  
parison will start. Comparison will be performed in ascending order of node  
address.  
To cancel the comparison, press the F9 (Cancel) Key.  
During comparison, Waitwill be displayed in the lower part of the screen  
and the progress of processing will be displayed for each node.  
If a comparison error is detected in a node, the node address and the execu-  
tion results will be highlighted.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
If no comparison error is detected in all the specified nodes, Compare OK”  
will be displayed. In this case, press the F10 (End) Key to quit the compari-  
son.  
If comparison errors are detected, message Will display differences. Speci-  
fy node addresswill be displayed along with the mode number of the small-  
est node address with a comparison error.  
5. Specify the node address of the node for which the comparison errors are to  
be displayed. Enter the network address with Numeric Keys, then press the  
Enter Key. The comparison error screen for the specified node will be dis-  
played.  
The comparison error screen differs depending on the location of the error.  
The following will be displayed when an inconsistency is found in the num-  
ber of nodes set, first status word, link start word of area 1, or link start word  
of area 2.  
When the number of nodes set is inconsistent, the number of words in area  
1, offset in area 1, the number of words in area 2, and offset in area 2 will  
not be compared.  
The following will be displayed when an inconsistency is found in the num-  
ber of words in area 1, offset in area 1, number of words in area 2, or offset  
in area 2.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
The message for the comparison results will be displayed in the lower part of  
the screen as follows:  
When comparison errors continue on the next page:  
When the comparison error screen is the last page:  
Continue”  
Last page”  
When inconsistent data is found, the data in the memory will be displayed in  
the upper row and the data at the node will be displayed in the lower row.  
(Consistent data will not be displayed.)  
6. If the comparison error screen extends across more than one page, use the  
F4 (Pre Pg) and F5 (Nxt Pg) Keys to switch the screen and display the re-  
sults. The Page Up and Page Down Keys can also be used to switch the  
screen.  
To display the comparison errors for another node, press the Escape Key to  
exit from the comparison error screen, then repeat the procedure from  
step 5.  
7. After checking the comparison results, press the F10 (End) Key.  
5-3-11 Deleting Data Link Tables from Nodes D: Delete Table  
D: Delete tableis used to delete the data link tables set at one or more nodes.  
Note 1) Data link tables cannot be deleted from a node that is currently participating  
in the data links.  
2) The nodes for which the number of nodes set in the data link table in the  
computer memory is 0 will be automatically selected as the nodes from  
which data link tables are to be deleted. Therefore, data link tables can be  
deleted from only the nodes that are not to participate in the data links. You  
can also change the target nodes for deletion.  
3) Always delete the data link tables from the nodes that are not be participat-  
ing in the data links.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select D: Delete tablefrom the Data Link Menu. The following window will  
be displayed to prompt you to specify the nodes from which data link tables  
are to be deleted.  
2. Specify the address of the Controller Link Network containing the nodes  
from which data link tables are to be deleted. Enter the network address with  
Numeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
When the Enter Key is pressed, the nodes on the specified network will be  
checked and displayed in ascending order of node address.  
When node addresses are displayed, YES or No will be displayed as fol-  
lows, depending on the number of nodes set in the data link table in the  
memory:  
Nodes for which the number of nodes is not 0: YES (data link tables deleted)  
Nodes for which the number of nodes is 0: No display (data link tables not  
deleted)  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
3. Specify the processing for each node. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cur-  
sor to the node for which the processing is to be changed, then press the  
Enter Key.  
Each time the Enter Key is pressed, the display will change as follows:  
YES (data link tables deleted)  
µ
No display (data link tables not deleted)  
4. After specifying all the nodes from which data link tables are to be deleted,  
press the F6 (Execute) Key. The deletion results screen will be displayed  
and data link table delete processing will start.  
Data link tables will be deleted in ascending order of node address.  
To cancel the delete processing, press the F9 (Cancel) Key.  
During delete processing, Waitwill be displayed in the lower part of the  
screen and the progress of processing will be displayed for each node.  
When the delete processing for all the specified nodes is completed, End”  
will be displayed in the lower part of the screen.  
5. Then, press the F10 (End) Key.  
5-3-12 Printing Data Link Tables P: Print Table  
P: Print tableis used to print the data link tables in the computer memory.  
Note Select Printer modelfrom the System Setup Menu and specify the printer mod-  
el before using P: Print table.”  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select P: Print tablefrom the Data Link Menu. The following window will be  
displayed to prompt you to specify the nodes for which the data link tables  
are to be printed.  
This window displays the nodes for which the number of nodes set in the  
data link table in the memory is not zero. These nodes are displayed in as-  
cending order of node address and YES is displayed at each node address  
to represent the nodes for which data link tables are to be printed.  
2. Select the nodes to be excluded from printing. Use the Cursor Keys to move  
the cursor to the node to be excluded from printing, then press the Enter Key.  
YES will be erased to deselect the node.  
To reselect a node for printing, move the cursor to the node unmarked with  
YES, then press the Enter Key again. YES will be displayed to reselect the  
node.  
3. After specifying all the target nodes for print processing, press the F6  
(Execute) Key. Data link table printing will start and the print status display  
window will appear. Data link tables will be printed in ascending order of  
node address.  
To cancel the printing, press the F9 (Cancel) Key.  
Printingwill be displayed during printing.  
When printing for all the specified nodes is completed, the print status dis-  
play window will close and the processing will automatically terminate.  
During printing, the print position will be automatically adjusted so that the  
data link table for one node is not split.  
The contents of the data link table being printed are the same as those dis-  
played on the Node Information List and Data Link Table Screens. The pres-  
ence or absence of the Offsetcolumn also depend son the data link table  
conditions.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
See 5-3-4 Creating and Editing Data Link Tables (page 52) for details on  
printing.  
Printing Example  
5-3-13 Starting and Stopping Data Links R: Start/Stop  
R: Start/Stopis used to start and stop data links.  
Caution Before starting data links, make sure that the data link tables for each node for  
!
manually set data links, or the data link parameters at the data link start node for  
automatically set data links, have been appropriately set. If the settings are inap-  
propriate, the equipment may perform unexpected operation and result in injury.  
Even if the settings are appropriate, always make sure that the equipment will  
not be affected before starting or stopping the data links.  
Note Before starting the data links, always check the data link mode (manual or auto-  
matic) set at the node from which the data links are to be started.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select R: Start/Stopfrom the Data Link Menu.  
2. Select R: Startto start the data links or S: Stopto stop the data links.  
Example for R: Start”  
3. Specify the node to start or stop the data links. Use the Cursor Keys to move  
the cursor to each field (PC ID,” “Network address,and Node address),  
then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys (enter a PC ID with Alphanu-  
meric Keys).  
Press the Enter Key to register the input item and move the cursor to the next  
field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the PC ID of the node.  
PC ID  
Use this field only when a PC ID is to be used. If a PC ID is  
used, the network address and node address will be specified  
automatically (see page 124).  
Network address  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the address  
of the network containing the node to which the Controller  
Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series, CVM1, or CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address explicitly.  
Node address  
Enter the node address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 62.  
Node address 0 represents the local node (the address of the  
node to which the Controller Link Support Software is  
connected).  
Note For CVM1 or CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996  
(lot No.: jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in the Network  
addressthe value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer  
to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
Press the F10 (End) Key to cancel the data link start/stop procedure.  
4. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. The data links for the specified network will be  
started or stopped.  
5-3-14 Displaying Data Link Status M: Monitor Status  
M: Monitor statusis used to check data link operations.  
Item  
Meaning  
Page  
S: Monitor Data Link  
status  
Displays data link operating status for  
the specified node.  
79  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Displaying the Monitor  
Data Link Status Menu  
To use each status monitor functions, select the desired function from the Moni-  
tor Data Link Status Menu. Select M: Monitor statusfrom the Data Link Menu.  
The Monitor Data Link Status Menu will be displayed.  
Displaying Data Link  
Status S: Monitor Data  
Link Status  
S: Monitor Data Link statusis used to display the data link operating status for  
the specified node.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select S: Monitor Data Link statusfrom the Monitor Data Link status  
Menu.  
2. Specify the node for which the data link status is to be displayed. Use the  
Cursor Keys to move the cursor to each field (PC ID,” “Network address,”  
and Node address), then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys (enter a  
PC ID with Alphanumeric Keys).  
Press the Enter Key to register the input item and move the cursor to the next  
field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the PC ID of the node.  
PC ID  
Use this field only when a PC ID is to be used. If a PC ID is  
used, the network address and node address will be input  
automatically(see page 124).  
Network address  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the address  
of the network containing the node to which the Controller  
Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series, CVM1, or CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address explicitly.  
Node address  
Enter the node address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 62.  
Node address 0 represents the local node (the address of the  
node to which the Controller Link Support Software is  
connected).  
Note For CVM1 or CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996  
(lot No.: jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network ad-  
dressthe value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to  
the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
Press the F10 (End) Key to cancel the data link start/stop procedure.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. Data link status will be read from the specified  
node and operating status will be displayed on the real-time basis.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Note The nodes registered in the data link table for the specified node are  
highlighted. They are the nodes that have data links to the specified  
node.  
Key  
F4 (Pre Pg)  
Page Up  
Function  
When this key is pressed, the node addresses for which  
the node status is displayed will change cyclically in the  
following order:  
1 to 16 17 to 32 33 to 48 49 to 62  
F5 (Nxt Pg)  
Page Down  
When this key is pressed, the node addresses for which  
the node status is displayed will change cyclically in the  
following order:  
49 to 62 33 to 48 17 to 32 1 to 16  
F9 (Cancel)  
F9 (Start)  
F10 (End)  
Stops updating the display and changes the F9 Key  
function to Start.”  
Restarts updating the display and changes the F9 Key  
function to Cancel.”  
Closes the operating status display screen.  
The meaning of each item is as follows:  
Item  
Meaning  
Communications Displays the current communications cycle time of the  
cycle time  
(Comm cycle  
time)  
Controller Link Network.  
Data link  
(DataLink)  
Displays the data link operating status, active/inactive on  
the top and manual/automatic on the bottom.  
Refresh cycle  
time  
(Refresh cycle)  
Displays the current data link refresh time (the period from  
the time the data link data is refreshed at the PC until the  
next refresh is completed) and the maximum data link  
refresh time that has been measured since the data links  
were started.  
For nodes with a Controller Link Support Board, the refresh  
cycle time is always 0 ms.  
Data link table  
(DataLink table)  
Displays whether data link tables have been set at the  
nodes displayed on the screen.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
Item  
PC run  
(PC Run)  
Meaning  
Displays the operating status of PC on the network as  
follows:  
When user program is not running on PC: No display  
When user program is running on PC: YES  
YES will be always displayed for nodes with a Controller  
Link Support Board.  
PC error  
(PC err)  
Displays error status of each PC on the network as follows:  
When the PC is operating normally or is not participating in  
the data link: No display  
When the PC has a fatal or nonfatal error: YES  
Communications Displays the communications status of each node on the  
error  
network as follows:  
(Comm err)  
When the node is communicating normally: No display  
When the node has caused a cyclic communications error  
or is not participating in the network: YES  
Data link join  
(DtLnk join)  
Displays the data link participation status of each node on  
the network as follows:  
When the node is not participating in the data link due to  
data link table error or other errors: No display  
When the node is participating in the data link: YES  
Offset error  
(offset err)  
Displays offset error status in the data link table for node  
communications within the network as follows:  
When there is no offset error: No display  
When there is an offset error: YES  
An offset error occurs when the offset value is greater than  
the number of send words.  
Area short  
(Area short)  
Displays area shortage status in the data link tables for  
node communications within the network as follows:  
When the area is sufficient: No display  
When the area is short: YES  
When the data link is inactive: No display.  
A short area occurs when the receive area is smaller than  
the amount of send data and not all of the send data can be  
received. It is not a fatal error. If the receive area  
intentionally receives only part of the send data, it can be  
used without having to make any changes.  
Area remaining  
(Area remain)  
Displays remaining area in the data link table for node  
communications within the network as follows:  
When the area does not remain empty: No display  
When words in the area remain empty: YES  
Remaining area occurs when the receive area is larger  
than the amount of send data and extra space remains  
unfilled after reception. The remaining space will be cleared  
with 0s. This is not a serious error. If the receive area  
intentionally provides extra space, it can be used without  
having to make any changes.  
5-3-15 Specifying Node Models I: Device Information Settings  
I: Device Info setis used to specify the models of the nodes that comprise the  
Controller Link Network. The specified data is saved as a file.  
The Controller Link Support Software performs word address validity checking  
according to the node model information specified in Device Info set.”  
Note 1) Model information for all nodes is unspecified (left blank) immediately after  
the Controller Link Support Software is initially started.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L: Data Link  
Section 5-3  
2) Executing Initialize tablemakes the model information for all nodes un-  
specified (blank).  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select I: Device Info setfrom the Data Link Menu.  
2. Select the node for which model is to be specified. Use the Cursor Keys to  
move the cursor to the target node, then press the Enter Key or the F6 (Se-  
lect) Key.  
Press the F7 (Fill) Key to select all nodes.  
Press the F3 (Delete) Key or the Delete Key to delete the model information  
for the node in the cursor position.  
Note a) If Othersis selected, restrictions for each model will no longer  
apply. Regardless of the model, restrictions will apply to only the  
upper limits when numeric values are entered or checked.  
b) New PCs that do not appear in the model list can be displayed and  
selected from Controller Link Support Software by editing the de-  
vice information setting file (see Appendix E Editing the Device In-  
formation Setting File).  
c) The version of the Controller Link Support Software is displayed  
on the logo screen when the software is started.  
3. Select the model to be set. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the  
model to be set, then press the Enter Key. The specified model will be set for  
the specified node. (Press the F7 Key to set the specified model for all the  
nodes.)  
4. After specifying the models for all the nodes, press the F10 (End) Key. The  
model setting procedure will end.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P: Set Network Parameters  
Section 5-4  
5-4 P: Set Network Parameters  
P: Set Network parametersis used to modify network communications param-  
eters to provide the most suitable Controller Link communications for the user  
application.  
Note 1) Network parameters cannot be set during data link operation. Set the net-  
work parameters after stopping the data links. (See 5-3-13 Starting and  
Stopping Data Links on page 77.)  
2) The same network parameters are used for all nodes within the Controller  
Link Network. Therefore, any change in each network parameters will affect  
all nodes within the network.  
3) Before executing P: Set Network parameters, always set pin 1 of the DIP  
switch on the CS1-series and CQM1H-series CPU Unit to OFF.  
4) Before executing P: Set Network parameters, always set the system pro-  
tect key switch on the CVM1 or CV-series CPU Unit to NORMAL.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select P: Set Network parametersfrom the Main Menu.  
2. Specify the address of the Controller Link Network for which network param-  
eters are to be changed. Enter the network address with Numeric Keys, then  
press the Enter Key. The current network parameter settings for the speci-  
fied network will be displayed.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P: Set Network Parameters  
Section 5-4  
3. Specify the new values for the network parameters. Use the Cursor Keys to  
move the cursor to the desired field, then enter a value with Numeric Keys.  
Press the Enter Key to register a new value and move the cursor to the next  
field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Maximum node  
address  
Maximum node address of nodes that are checked by the  
network polling node. Any node with a node address greater  
(Max node address) than this setting will not participate in the network.  
Unnecessary polling (connection checking) can be avoided  
by setting the maximum node address of the nodes to be  
checked.  
The setting range is between 2 and 62.  
The default is 62.  
Number of  
Maximum amount of event data (such as message service  
data) that can be transmitted during a communications cycle  
Event-frames per  
communications  
cycle  
(# of Event-frames  
per comm cycle)  
Increasing the value also increases the communications  
cycle time.  
Too small a value results in frequent transmission timeout  
errors.  
The setting range is between 16 and 238.  
The default is 35.  
Number of Polled  
nodes per  
communications  
cycle  
(# of Polled nodes  
per comm cycle)  
Maximum number of nodes for which communications  
status can be checked by the network polling node during a  
communication cycle  
Increasing the value also increases the communications  
cycle time but provides quicker response to nodes  
participating in or leaving the network.  
The setting range is between 1 and 61.  
The default is 4.  
Press the F7 (Initialize) Key to set each item to its default.  
Note If the Controller Link Network consists of Units other than Optical  
Ring Controller Link Units, do not set node addresses higher than 32.  
(Node addresses higher than 32 can only be set for Controller Link  
Networks that consist of only Optical Ring Controller Link Units.)  
4. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. A confirmation message will be displayed at the  
bottom of the window.  
5. Press Yand then the Enter Key. The network parameter settings will be  
modified.  
To cancel the processing, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5 R: Routing Table  
R: Routing tableis used to manage the routing tables used for determining  
communications paths between multiple networks. It has the following menu.  
Menu item  
E: Edit  
Function  
Page  
Creates or edits routing tables. Routing tables 88  
are created in the computer memory. To set  
the routing tables for each node, execute  
T: Transfer.”  
K: Check  
Checks the routing tables in the memory for  
errors or inconsistencies.  
91  
C: Initialize  
Initializes (or clears) the routing tables in the 93  
memory. Use this item when routing tables  
are to be created from scratch.  
S: Save  
Saves routing tables in the memory as a file. 93  
L: Retrieve  
Reads routing tables from the file into the  
memory.  
94  
T: Transfer  
Writes routing tables from the memory to the 94  
specified node or reads routing tables from  
the specified node into the memory. This item  
can also be used to compare the routing  
tables in the memory with the routing tables  
at the specified node.  
D: Delete  
P: Print  
Deletes routing tables from the specified  
node.  
98  
Prints routing tables in the memory.  
99  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-1 Outline of Routing Tables  
Routing tables must be set when the local node communicates with PCs, com-  
puters, and other nodes on remote networks. Routing tables need not be set  
when the node communicates only with other nodes on the local network.  
Note For CVM1 or CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996 (lot No.:  
jj46), always set routing tables. Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation  
Manual (W309) for details.  
About Routing Tables  
Routing tables define communications paths when a local node communicates  
with nodes on remote networks.  
The following is a network example and the data required to create routing tables  
is explained below.  
Computer  
Programming Device  
(Controller Link Support  
Software)  
SYSMAC NET  
(network 2)  
Controller Link Network  
(network 1)  
Gateway  
SYSMAC NET Link Unit  
Controller Link Unit  
Controller Link Unit  
(node address 5)  
(unit number 0)  
In this network example, when the PC connected to the Programming Device on  
network 1 is to communicate with a PC on network 2, you need to create routing  
tables containing the following information and transfer them to the PCs and  
computer on network 2.  
The local node belongs to network 1 (local network).  
The unit number of the Communications Unit is 0 (link unit number).  
Communications is performed via the Communications Unit with node ad-  
dress 5 that belongs to network 1 (relay node).  
The local node communicates with the remote network via network 1 (relay  
network).  
The local node communicates with a node on network 2 (end network).  
Routing Tables for PC (A)  
Local Network Table  
Local network  
Link unit number  
001  
00  
Relay Network Table  
End network  
Relay network  
Relay node  
002  
001  
005  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-2 Setting Routing Tables  
Create and transfer routing tables for each node according to the following set-  
ting procedures.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Editon page 88.  
2. Checkon page 91.  
3. Saveon page 93.  
4. Computer PC/Boardunder Transferon page 96.  
Caution Once routing tables are transferred to a PC, all CPU Bus Units at the node (ex-  
cept SYSMAC BUS/2 Master Units) will be reset. Before transferring the routing  
tables, always make sure that the equipment will not be affected.  
!
Note 1) If routing tables have already been saved or transferred, the following pro-  
cedures can be used to read the routing tables into the Controller Link Sup-  
port Software and edit them again.  
Retrieveon page 94.  
PC/Board Computerunder Transferon page 95.  
2) The Controller Link Support Software can create and transfer routing tables  
for all nodes supporting FINS commands, as well as for the Controller Link  
Units and Controller Link Support Boards. It cannot create or transfer rout-  
ing tables for PCs for which the SYSMAC NET Link Unit is set to C Mode  
even if these PCs are CVM1 or CV-series PCs. In this case, connect the  
SYSMAC Support Software directly to such nodes and create and transfer  
routing tables.  
3) The Controller Link Support Software can set a local network table contain-  
ing up to 16 entries and a relay network table containing up to 20 entries. For  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs, a maximum of two entries can be made in the local  
network table.  
5-5-3 Communications Range  
Network  
Communications Range  
The Controller Link Support Software can communicate with nodes on a Con-  
troller Link Network via OA networks (Ethernet networks) or FA networks (Con-  
troller Link, SYSMAC NET, and SYSMAC LINK networks) to set or monitor the  
Controller Link Units and Controller Support Boards at remote nodes.  
The Controller Link Support Software can communicate with up to three net-  
works.  
Running from a Programming Device  
SYSMAC NET Net-  
work (2nd network)  
Computer running the  
Controller Link Support  
Software  
4 Network levels  
are not possible  
Controller Link Network Controller Link Net- Controller Link Net-  
(1st network: local)  
work (3rd network)  
work (4th network)  
The connection to the  
PC is not counted as  
a network level.  
Relay Nodes  
Only CS1-series, CVM1, and CV-series PCs can be used as nodes for relaying  
between networks. Install multiple Communications Units on a PC to relay be-  
tween networks.  
C-series PCs and IBM PC/AT computers cannot be used as relay nodes (but can  
be used as source and destination nodes).  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-4 Displaying the Routing Table Menu  
To create or edit routing tables, select the corresponding function from the Rout-  
ing Table Menu.  
Each function is described on the following pages. The Routing Table Menu is  
displayed as follows:  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select R: Routing tablefrom the Main Menu. The routing table (local net-  
work table) will be displayed.  
2. Press the F2 (Menu) Key. The Routing Table Menu will be displayed.  
5-5-5 Creating and Editing Routing Tables E: Edit  
E: Editis used to create or edit the routing tables: the local network table and  
the relay network table.  
Note 1) E: Editcreates or edits routing tables in the computer memory. To actually  
set the routing tables at a node, select T: Transferfrom the Routing Table  
Menu. Also, save the routing tables as a file by selecting S: Savefrom the  
Routing Table Menu. The table data will be cleared when the Controller Link  
Support Software is exited.  
2) The Controller Link Support Software can create routing tables for only one  
node at a time. If routing tables for more than one node are to be created,  
save the created routing tables for a node, then create routing tables for the  
next node.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select E: Editfrom the Routing Table Menu. The Local Network Table  
Screen will be displayed. The Local Network Table Screen can also be dis-  
played by selecting R: Routing tablefrom the Main Menu.  
2. Set the local network table. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the  
desired position, then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys.  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next position.  
Item  
Loc Netwk  
Meaning  
Specify the address of the network to which the  
Communications Unit or Board installed at the target node  
belongs.  
The setting range is between 1 and 127.  
Be careful not to specify the same network address for more  
than one network.  
SIOU unit #  
Specify the unit number of the Communications Unit or  
Board that is installed at the target node and is connected to  
the local network.  
The setting range is between 0 and 15.  
With Controller Link, the unit number is set in the following  
locations.  
Communications Unit: Rotary switch on the front panel of  
the Unit for CS1-series, CVM1, and  
CV-series PCs  
DIP switch pin 4 on the front panel  
of the Unit for C200HX/HG/HE  
PCs)  
(Fixed to 0 for CQM1H PCs.)  
Communications Board: Option switch on Controller Link  
BIOS (device driver)  
Enter the same unit number as the above setting.  
Press the F6 (Insert) Key or the Insert Key to insert one blank line before the  
cursor line. (You cannot move the cursor until you enter s a value in the Loc  
Netwkcolumn on the blank line.)  
Press the F7 (Delete) Key or the Delete Key to delete the line on which the  
cursor is currently positioned.  
3. After entering all the necessary values in the local network table, press the  
F4 (Pre Pg) Key or the F5 (Nxt Pg) Key. The Relay Network Table Screen will  
be displayed.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
Press the Page Up Key or the Page Down Key to switch between the Local  
Network Table Screen and the Relay Network Table Screen.  
4. Set the relay network table. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the  
desired position, then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys. (Use Al-  
phanumeric Keys to enter the PC ID of each relay node.)  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next position.  
Item  
Meaning  
End Network  
Specify the address of the destination network.  
The setting range is between 1 and 127.  
Be careful not to specify the same network address for two  
different networks.  
Relay PC ID  
Relay network  
Relay node  
Specify the PC ID of the relay node.  
This entry is valid only when PC IDs are used. If PC IDs are  
used, network and node addresses are automatically input  
(see page 124.)  
Specify the network address of the relay node. Enter one of  
the values specified in the Loc Netwkcolumn of the Local  
Network Table.  
The setting range is between 1 and 127.  
Specify the node address of the relay node.  
The setting range is between 1 and 126 (or between 1 and  
62 for Controller Link Networks). (see note)  
Note The setting range for Controller Link Units other than Optical Ring  
Controller Link Units is between 1 and 32.  
Press the F6 (Insert) Key or the Insert Key to insert one blank line before the  
cursor line. (You cannot move the cursor until you enter a value in the End  
Netwkcolumn on the blank line.)  
Press the F7 (Delete) Key or the Delete Key to delete the line on which the  
cursor is currently positioned.  
5. After entering all the necessary values in the relay network table, press the  
F10 (End) Key.  
Even if the Relay Network Table Screen is switched to another screen, the  
contents of the routing table will be retained until the Controller Link Support  
Software is exited.  
To return to the Local Network Table Screen, use the F4 (Pre Pg) Key, F5  
(Nxt Pg) Key, Page Up Key, or Page Down Key.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-6 Checking Routing Tables K: Check  
K: Checkis used to check the routing tables for errors or inconsistencies. If er-  
rors are detected, correct the routing tables as described in Error Messages (on  
page 92).  
Note K: Checkchecks the routing tables in the computer memory. To check the rout-  
ing tables that have been set at a node, use T: Transferon the Routing Table  
Menu to read the tables to the computer, then execute K: Check.”  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select K: Checkfrom the Routing Table Menu. The routing table check will  
start and the check results screen will be displayed.  
A message will be displayed in the lower part of the screen according to the  
check results as follows:  
When no error has been detected: Check OK”  
When errors are continued on the next page: Continue”  
When the current screen is the last page: Last page”  
2. When errors are displayed on multiple screens, use the F4 (Pre Pg) Key, the  
F5 (Nxt Pg) Key, the Page Up Key, or the Page Down Key to switch the  
screen and display the check results. After confirming the check results,  
press the F10 (End) Key.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
Error Messages  
The following tables list the error messages that are displayed on the check re-  
sults screen. After confirming the check results, use E: Editto correct the rout-  
ing tables, then check them again.  
Local Network Table  
Error message  
Meaning  
Action to be taken  
Too many networks  
The number of networks set Initialize the routing tables,  
in the table is outside the  
allowable range (0 to 16).  
then set them again.  
Data may have been  
damaged.  
Local netwk addr err The network address  
Change the network address  
specified in the Loc Netwkto a value between 1 and  
column is outside the  
127.  
allowable range (1 to 127).  
SIOU unit No. range The unit number is outside  
Change the unit number to a  
value between 0 and 15.  
err  
the allowable range (0 to  
15).  
Dup local netwk addr The same local network  
address is specified more  
than once.  
Change the local network  
address to a unique address.  
Dup SIOU unit No.  
err  
The same unit number is  
specified more than once.  
Change the unit number to a  
unique number.  
Relay Network Table  
Error message  
Meaning  
Action to be taken  
Too many networks  
The number of networks set Initialize the routing tables,  
in the table is outside the  
allowable range (0 to 20).  
then set them again.  
Data may have been  
damaged.  
End netwk addr  
range err  
The end network address is Change the network address  
outside the allowable range  
(1 to 127).  
to a value between 1 and  
127.  
Relay netwk addr rng The relay network address is Change the network address  
err  
outside the allowable range  
(1 to 127).  
to a value between 1 and  
127.  
Relay node addr rng The relay node address is  
Change the network address  
to a value between 1 and  
126.  
err  
outside the allowable range  
(1 to 126).  
Dup end netwk addr The same end network  
address is specified more  
than once.  
Change the local network  
address to a unique address.  
Relay netwk addr err A network address not in the Specify one of the network  
local network table is addresses set in the local  
specified as a relay network network table.  
address.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-7 Initializing Routing Tables C: Initialize  
C: Initializeis use to initialize routing tables.  
Note 1) C: Initializeinitializes the routing tables in the computer memory. To initial-  
ize the routing tables that have been set at a node, select D: Deletefrom  
the Routing Table Menu.  
2) Initializing the routing tables makes them unspecified (blank).  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select C: Initializefrom the Routing Table Menu. The following confirma-  
tion message will be displayed.  
2. To initialize the routing tables, press Yand then the Enter Key. The routing  
tables will be initialized.  
To cancel the initialization processing, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
5-5-8 Saving Routing Tables as a File S: Save  
S: Saveis used to save routing tables as a file.  
Note 1) Unless saved, the routing tables in the memory will be lost when the Control-  
ler Link Support Software is exited.  
2) If routing tables have been modified but have not yet been saved, a con-  
firmation message will be displayed when you attempt to exit the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
3) S: Saveis used to save routing tables residing in the computer memory. To  
save the routing tables that have already been set at a node, select  
T: Transferfrom the Routing Table Menu to read the tables to the comput-  
er, then save them.  
4) Routing table files for the Controller Link Support Software are compatible  
with those for the SYSMAC Support Software and the SYSMAC LINK Sup-  
port Utility. Therefore, routing files can be transferred between them.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select S: Savefrom the Routing Table Menu.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory name) to be saved. Enter the  
file name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
The extension of the file name to be saved must be .RTG. If the extension is  
omitted, .RTG will be automatically added as an extension.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in System setup”  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
Alternatively, you can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List  
Screen and then select a file name from the screen.  
If an existing file name is specified, a confirmation message will be dis-  
played to ask you to check whether the file can be overwritten. Press Yto  
overwrite the file or press Nto cancel the save processing, then press the  
Enter Key.  
3. Enter a title to be attached to the file. Enter a title with Alphanumeric Keys,  
then press the Enter Key. Up to 30 characters can be entered as the title.  
The Insert, Backspace, and Delete Keys can be used to correct the charac-  
ters displayed.  
If no title is required, just press the Enter Key.  
The file will be saved.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-9 Reading Routing Tables from the File L: Retrieve  
L: Retrieveis used to read routing tables from a file into the memory.  
Note 1) If routing tables are read from a file, the current routing tables residing in the  
memory will be lost.  
2) If routing tables in the memory have been modified, a confirmation window  
will be displayed when you attempt to read routing tables from a file.  
3) Routing table files for the Controller Link Support Software are compatible  
with those for the SYSMAC Support Software and the SYSMAC LINK Sup-  
port Utility. Therefore, routing files can be transferred between them.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select L: Retrievefrom the Routing Table Menu. If routing tables in the  
memory have been modified, a confirmation window will be displayed.  
Press Yto continue the read processing or press Nto cancel the proces-  
sing, and then press the Enter Key.  
If routing tables in the memory have not been modified or Yis pressed to  
continue, the following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify a  
file name.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory name) to be read. Enter the file  
name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in System setup”  
will be displayed as the source directory. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
The file will be read.  
5-5-10 Transferring Routing Tables T: Transfer  
T: Transferis used to transfer routing tables between the personal computer  
and the specified node as follows:  
Item  
Function  
Page  
R: PC/Board →  
Computer  
Reads the routing tables set at the  
specified node into the computer memory.  
95  
W: Computer →  
PC/Board  
Writes the routing tables from the memory 96  
to the specified node for registration.  
V: Compare  
Compares the routing tables set at the  
specified node with the routing tables in  
the memory.  
96  
Displaying the Transfer  
Routing Table Menu  
The following procedure is sued to display the Transfer Routing Table Menu.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select T: Transferfrom the Routing Table Menu. The following window will  
be displayed to prompt you to specify the target node.  
2. Specify the desired node. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the  
desired field, then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys. (Use Alphanu-  
meric Keys to enter a PC ID.)  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the PC ID of the node.  
PC ID  
Use this field only when a PC ID is to be used. If a PC ID is  
used, the network address and node address will be input  
automatically (see page 124).  
Network address  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the  
address of the network containing the node to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series, CVM1, and CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address  
explicitly.  
Node address  
Enter the node address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 126.  
Node address 0 represents the local node (the address of  
the node to which the Controller Link Support Software is  
connected).  
Note For CVM1 or CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996  
(lot No.: jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network ad-  
dressthe value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to  
the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
Press the F10 (End) Key to cancel the routing table transfer.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. The Transfer Routing Table Menu will be dis-  
played.  
Reading Routing Tables  
from a Node —  
R: PC/Board Computer  
R: PC/Board Computeris used to read the routing tables set at the specified  
node into the computer memory.  
Note If routing tables are read from a node, the current routing tables in the memory  
will be lost. If routing tables in the memory have been modified, a confirmation  
window will be displayed when you attempt to read routing tables from a node.  
To save the routing tables already in the memory, select S: Savefrom the Rout-  
ing Table Menu to save them as a file.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select R: PC/Board Computerfrom the Transfer Routing Table Menu. If  
routing tables in the memory have been modified, a confirmation window will  
be displayed. Press Yto continue or press Nto cancel the processing,  
and then press the Enter Key.  
If routing tables in the memory have not been modified or Yis pressed to  
continue, routing table read will start.  
If the routing table read terminates normally, the following window will be dis-  
played.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
Writing Routing Tables to  
Nodes W: Computer →  
PC/Board  
W: Computer PC/Boardis used to write the routing tables from the computer  
memory to a node.  
Caution Once routing tables are transferred to a PC, all CPU Bus Units at the node (ex-  
cept SYSMAC BUS/2 Master Units) will be reset. Before transferring the routing  
tables, always make sure that the equipment will not be affected.  
!
Note 1) If routing tables are written to a node, the existing routing tables set at the  
node will be lost. In this case, a confirmation message for overwriting will not  
be displayed even if routing tables have already been set at the node.  
Therefore, carefully check the contents of the routing tables set at the node  
before transferring routing tables.  
2) When writing routing tables for the first time, perform the following proce-  
dure.  
a) Connect the Controller Link Support Software to nodes with only one  
Communications Unit or Board that reside on the network for which the  
routing tables are to be set.  
b) Specify 0 as the network address of the target network.  
c) Write the routing tables to each node on the network.  
d) If the routing tables are to be written to another network, connect the  
Controller Link Support Software to a node on that network.  
Select W: Computer PC/Boardfrom the Transfer Routing Table Menu. Rout-  
ing table write processing will start.  
If the routing table write terminates normally, the following window will be dis-  
played.  
Note For C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H Controller Link Units, the Routing Table Enable  
Bit in the DM Parameter Area must be set to ON (enabled). If the Routing Table  
Enable Bit is set to OFF (disabled), routing tables cannot be written to the node.  
Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
Comparing Routing  
Tables V: Compare  
V: Compareis used to compare the routing tables in the computer memory with  
the routing tables at the specified node.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select V: Comparefrom the Transfer Routing Table Menu. Routing table  
comparison will start.  
During comparison, Waitwill be displayed in the window.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
When the comparison is completed, the comparison results screen will be  
displayed.  
A message will be displayed in the lower part of the screen according to the  
comparison results as follows:  
When all data matches: Check OK”  
When inconsistencies continue on the next page: Continue”  
When the current screen is the last page: Last page”  
When inconsistent data is found, the data in the memory will be displayed in  
the upper row and the data at the node will be displayed in the lower row. *”  
indicates that no corresponding data exists.  
2. If the comparison results screen extends across more than one page, use  
the F4 (Pre Pg) and F5 (Nxt Pg) Keys to switch the screen and display the  
results. The Page Up and Page Down Keys can also be used to switch the  
screen.  
3. After checking the comparison results, press the F10 (End) Key.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-11 Deleting Routing Tables from a Node D: Delete  
D: Deleteis used to delete the routing tables set at the specified node.  
Caution Once routing tables are removed from a PC, all CPU Bus Units at the node (ex-  
cept SYSMAC BUS/2 Master Units) will be reset. Before deleting the routing  
tables, always make sure that the equipment will not be affected.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select D: Deletefrom the Routing Table Menu. The following window will  
be displayed to prompt you to specify the node from which routing tables are  
to be deleted.  
2. Specify the target node. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to a desired  
field, then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys. (Use Alphanumeric  
Keys to enter a PC ID.)  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the PC ID of the node.  
PC ID  
Use this field only when a PC ID is to be used. If a PC ID is  
used, the network address and node address will be  
automatically input (see page 124).  
Network address  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the  
address of the network containing the node to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series, CVM1, and CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address  
explicitly.  
Node address  
Enter the node address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 126.  
Node address 0 represents the local node (the address of  
the node to which the Controller Link Support Software is  
connected).  
Note For CVM1 or CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996  
(lot No.: jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network ad-  
dressthe value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to  
the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
Press the F10 (End) Key to cancel the routing table delete processing.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. A confirmation window for deletion will be dis-  
played.  
4. To delete the routing tables, press Yand then the Enter Key. The routing  
tables will be deleted.  
To cancel the delete processing, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R: Routing Table  
Section 5-5  
5-5-12 Printing Routing Tables P: Print  
P: Printis used to print routing tables residing in the computer memory.  
Note Select Printer modelfrom the System Setup Menu and specify the printer mod-  
el before using P: Print.”  
Select P: Printfrom the Routing Table Menu. Printing will start.  
During printing, Printingwill be displayed in the window.  
When printing is completed, the window will close and the processing will termi-  
nate automatically.  
The contents of the local network and relay network tables will be printed. The  
contents of these tables being printed are the same as those displayed on the  
Local Network Table and Relay Network Table Screens. See 5-5-5 Creating and  
Editing Routing Tables (page 88) for details.  
Printing Example  
End  
Relay  
Netwk  
No.  
Netwk  
PC ID  
node  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N: Echoback Test  
Section 5-6  
5-6 N: Echoback Test  
N: Echoback testis used to conduct a communications test (echoback test)  
between the Controller Link Support Software and the specified node.  
An echoback test is conducted by transmitting the specified bytes of data to the  
specified node and comparing the original data with the data returned from the  
node (echoback data). If the original data and the returned data are identical, the  
test will be successful. If they are different, the test will fail.  
Note An echoback test can be conducted for any node that supports FINS com-  
mands.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select N: Echoback testfrom the Main Menu. The following window will be  
displayed to prompt you to specify the target node for an echoback test.  
2. Specify the target node and the test conditions to be used. Use the Cursor  
Keys to move the cursor to the desired field, then enter a numeric value with  
Numeric Keys. (Use Alphanumeric Keys to enter a PC ID.)  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the PC ID of the node.  
PC ID  
Use this field only when a PC ID is to be used. If a PC ID is  
used, the network address and node address will be  
automatically input (see page 124).  
Network address  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the  
address of the network containing the node to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series and CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address  
explicitly.  
Node address  
Enter the node address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 62.  
Node address 0 represents the local node (the address of  
the node to which the Controller Link Support Software is  
connected).  
Test data length  
Specify the number of bytes of data to be transmitted for the  
echoback test.  
The setting range is as follows:  
Controller Link Support Boards: 1 to 1,998 bytes  
Controller Link Units: 1 to 512 bytes  
# of tests  
Specify the number of echoback tests to be repeated.  
The setting range is between 1 and 9999. Alternatively, an  
asterisk (*) can be specified. If * is specified, an echoback  
test will be repeated until the F9 (Cancel) Key is pressed.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D: Broadcast Test  
Section 5-7  
Note For CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996 (lot No.:  
jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network addressthe  
value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to the Con-  
troller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. A confirmation message will be displayed at the  
bottom of the window to ask you to determine whether the echoback test is  
to be started.  
4. To start the test, press Yand then the Enter Key. The echoback test will be  
started.  
To cancel execution of the test, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
The progress of the echoback test will be displayed in the following window.  
During the test, the values displayed in the # tests,” “# OK,and Errors”  
fields will be updated.  
To cancel the test during execution, press the F9 (Cancel) Key. (The F9 Key  
is valid only during the echoback test.)  
When the specified number of tests are completed, updating of the values in  
the above fields will stop and the function key display will change.  
5. After confirming the test results, press the F9 (End) Key.  
5-7 D: Broadcast Test  
D: Broadcast testis used to broadcast a communications test from the Control-  
ler Link Support Software to all the nodes participating in the specified network.  
In a broadcast test, the Controller Link Support Software simultaneously trans-  
mits the specified bytes of test data to all nodes the specified number of times.  
After test data has been transmitted, the Controller Link Support Software moni-  
tors the number of times the test data has been received by each node and de-  
termines the success count for each node. (The contents of each received test  
data will not be checked.) If the success count differs from the number of tests  
conducted for a node, the node has communications problems.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select D: Broadcast testfrom the Main Menu.  
2. Specify the target network and the test conditions to be used. Use the Cur-  
sor Keys to move the cursor to the desired field, then enter a numeric value  
with Numeric Keys.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D: Broadcast Test  
Section 5-7  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the  
address of the network containing the node to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series and CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address  
explicitly.  
Test data length  
Specify the number of bytes of data to be transmitted for the  
echoback test.  
The setting range is as follows:  
Controller Link Support Boards: 1 to 1,998 bytes  
Controller Link Units: 1 to 512 bytes  
# of tests  
Specify the number of broadcast tests to be repeated.  
The setting range is between 1 and 9999.  
Note For CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996 (lot No.:  
jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network addressthe  
value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to the Con-  
troller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. A confirmation message will be displayed at the  
bottom of the window to ask you to determine whether a broadcast test is to  
be started.  
4. To delete the routing tables, press Yand then the Enter Key. The routing  
tables will be deleted. A broadcast test will be started.  
To cancel execution of the test, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
The progress of the broadcast test will be displayed on the following screen.  
During the test, the value displayed in the # testsfield will be updated.  
To cancel the test during execution, press the F9 (Cancel) Key. (The F9 Key  
is valid only during a broadcast test.)  
When the specified number of tests are completed, the success count will  
be displayed for each node and the function key display will also change.  
The progress of the broadcast test will be displayed in the # testsfield as  
follows: Number of times test data was transmitted / Specified number of  
tests to be repeated.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C: Monitor Network  
Section 5-8  
The number of times the test data was received by each node will be dis-  
played in the # OKcolumn. Each node can be checked for communica-  
tions problems by comparing the value in the # OKcolumn with the number  
of times the test was repeated.  
5. After confirming the test results, press the F9 (End) Key.  
5-8 C: Monitor Network  
C: Monitor Networkis used to display the status of the specified Controller Link  
Network on the real-time basis.  
The following information will be displayed.  
Item  
Meaning  
Communications  
cycle time  
Displays the latest communications cycle time of the  
specified network.  
(Comm cycle time)  
Data link activity  
(DataLink)  
Displays the data link operation status of the specified  
network.  
Network participation Displays the network participation status of each node as  
(In netwk)  
follows:  
YES:  
Participating in Network  
No display: Not participating in Network  
Data link  
participation  
(DtLnk join)  
Displays the data link participation status of each node as  
follows:  
YES:  
Participating in data links  
No display: Not Participating in data links  
This item is not displayed when the data links are inactive.  
Displays the operation mode of each PC as follows:  
PC operating status  
(PC Run)  
YES:  
User program is running on the PC  
No display: User program is not running on the PC  
This item is not displayed when the data links are inactive.  
The user program may stop when an error occurs in DATA  
LINK START or MONITOR mode. In this case, nothing will  
be displayed.  
YES is always displayed for the Controller Link Support  
Board.  
PC error status  
(PC err)  
Displays the PC error status of each node as follows:  
YES:  
Stopped due to an error  
No display: Operating normally  
This item is not displayed when the data links are inactive.  
Nothing is always displayed for the Controller Link Support  
Board.  
Communications  
error status  
Displays the communications error status of each node as  
follows:  
(Comm err)  
YES:  
Error or not participating in network  
No display: Operating normally  
This item is not displayed when the data links are inactive or  
the local node is not participating in the data links.  
This monitoring is not possible when the PC to which the Controller Link Support  
Software is connected or the computer on which the Controller Link Support  
Software is running is not participating in the network.  
Note The Monitor Networkfunction can be used only for Controller Link Networks. If  
networks other than Controller Link are specified, network status will not be dis-  
played normally.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E: Display Error Log  
Section 5-9  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select C: Monitor Networkfrom the Main Menu.  
2. Specify the address of the network for which the status is to be displayed.  
Enter the network address with Numeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. The Network Monitor Screen will be displayed.  
Key  
Function  
Displays the previous screen.  
F4 Key (Pre Pg)  
Page Up Key  
F5 Key (Nxt Pg)  
Page Down Key  
Displays the next screen.  
F9 (Cancel)  
Stops updating the display and changes the F9 Key function  
to Start.”  
F9 (Start)  
Restarts updating the display and changes the F9 Key  
function to Cancel.”  
4. To close the screen, press the F10 (End) Key.  
5-9 E: Display Error Log  
Use E: Error logto display, clear, save and print error logs.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E: Display Error Log  
Section 5-9  
E: Error loghas the following menu.  
Menu item  
R: Read  
Function  
Page  
Reads and displays the  
error log recorded at the  
specified node. Can also  
be used to clear the error  
log currently displayed.  
106  
L: Retrieve  
S: Save  
Reads error logs saved in 108  
files to computer memory.  
Saves error logs in  
108  
computer memory as files.  
P: Print  
Prints the error log  
currently in computer  
memory.  
108  
5-9-1 About Error Logs  
The Controller Link Unit and the Controller Link Support Board both have an er-  
ror logging function, which records error types, error details, and the date and  
time of error occurrence for all errors that occurred during communications.  
Reading the error log recorded in the Controller Link Unit or Controller Link Sup-  
port Board allows you to check the errors that occurred in the past and detect  
network problems.  
The Controller Link Support Software displays the error log information in the  
table below in chronological order. It can also clear the currently displayed error  
log, or save it as a file, and read and display error log files.  
Item  
Meaning  
Err  
Displays an error code that indicates an error type. Refer to  
the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) or  
Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual (W307)  
for details.  
Details  
Displays a code that indicates error details. Refer to the  
Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) or Controller  
Link Support Boards Operation Manual (W307) for details.  
Time of error  
Displays the date and time the error occurred.  
Note Some Units other than the Controller Link Unit and Controller Link Support  
Board also have an error logging function. Error logs can be displayed for Units  
that have an error log and support FINS commands using the Controller Link  
Support Software.  
5-9-2 Data Formats for Error Log Files  
Error logs can be saved as text files using the Controller Link Support Software.  
Error log files can be read and edited using standard text editors enabling the  
data to be used in other applications, such as network maintenance. Details  
about the data formats for error log files are provided here.  
Note The extension for error log files is .CLG.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E: Display Error Log  
Section 5-9  
The structure of error log files is as shown below.  
System debugging error log  
xxxxxx [CR] [LF]  
Title (30 bytes)  
LINE-A1 xxx [CR] [LF]  
PC ID (10 bytes)  
Time of reading  
(Year/month/day, hours:seconds:minutes)  
(2 digits, BCD for each)  
00/01/18, 14:56:53 [CR] [LF]  
0012 [CR] [LF]  
62 [CR] [LF]  
Network address (4 digits, BCD)  
Node address (2 digits, BCD)  
0005 [CR] [LF]  
0002, 232D, 00/01/03, 01:18:18 [CR] [LF]  
0006, 0800, 00/01/02, 21:37:04 [CR] [LF]  
0004, 0000, 00/01/02, 23:39:02 [CR] [LF]  
021A, 0003, 99/12/24, 23:59:59 [CR] [LF]  
0209, 0001, 99/12/24, 23:59:58 [CR] [LF]  
No. of error log items (4 digits, hexadecimal)  
xxxx, xxxx, xx/xx/xx, xx:xx:xx [CR] [LF]  
xxxx, xxxx, xx/xx/xx, xx:xx:xx [CR] [LF]  
xxxx, xxxx, xx/xx/xx, xx:xx:xx [CR] [LF]  
Error Log  
Each item consists of the following information:  
Error code (4 digits, hexadecimal)  
Detail code (4 digits, hexadecimal)  
Time of error (year/month/day, hours: minutes:  
seconds) (2 digits, BCD for each)  
:
:
xxxx, xxxx, xx/xx/xx, xx:xx:xx [CR] [LF]  
xxxx, xxxx, xx/xx/xx, xx:xx:xx [CR] [LF]  
xxxx, xxxx, xx/xx/xx, xx:xx:xx [CR] [LF]  
Error log files always contain 39 lines of error  
information. If the actual number of error log items  
is less than 39, the unused areas will be filled with  
spaces (20 Hex).  
x:  
Space (20 Hex)  
[CR] [LF]: Carriage return (0D Hex, 0A Hex)  
Unused parts of the title and PC ID lines are filled with spaces.  
The year is indicated by just the last 2 digits.  
Files that are not in the above format cannot be displayed correctly. When edit-  
ing error log files, be sure to keep to this format.  
5-9-3 Displaying the Error Log Menu  
To read, display, save, load or print error logs, first select the required function  
from the Error Log Menu. Explanations for each of the functions appear on the  
following pages. The method for displaying the Error Log Menu is given below.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select E: Display Error logfrom the Main Menu. The Error Log Menu will be  
displayed.  
The Error Log Menu can be displayed from the Error Log Screen by pressing  
the F2 (Submenu) Key.  
5-9-4 Reading Error Logs R: Read  
R: Readis used to read and display the error log recorded for a specified node.  
It can also be used to clear the error log currently displayed.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select R: Readfrom the Error Log Menu. The following window will be dis-  
played to prompt you to specify the node to be read.  
2. Specify the target node. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the de-  
sired field, then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys. (Use Alphanu-  
meric Keys to enter a PC ID.)  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E: Display Error Log  
Section 5-9  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the PC ID of the node.  
PC ID  
(PC ID)  
Use this field only when a PC ID is to be used. If a PC ID is  
used, the network address and node address will be  
automatically input (see page 124).  
Network address  
(Netwk adrs)  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the  
address of the network containing the node to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series and CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address  
explicitly.  
Node address  
(Node adr)  
Enter the node address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 32.  
Node address 0 represents the local node (the address of  
the node to which the Controller Link Support Software is  
connected).  
Note For CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996 (lot No.:  
jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network addressthe  
value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to the Con-  
troller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
Press the F10 (End) Key to close the error log window.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. The error log will be read from the specified  
node and displayed on the Error Log Screen.  
4. To clear the error log, press the F7 (Clear) Key. A confirmation message will  
be displayed at the bottom of the screen to ask you to determine whether the  
error log is to be cleared.  
To clear the error log, press Yand then the Enter Key. Both the error log at  
the node and the error log displayed on the screen will be cleared.  
To cancel the processing, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
The screen can be switched by pressing the F4 (Pre Pg), F5 (Nxt Pg), Page  
Up, or Page Down Key.  
5. To close the screen, press the F10 (End) Key.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E: Display Error Log  
Section 5-9  
5-9-5 Reading Error Logs from a File L: Retrieve  
L: Retrieveis used to read error logs from files.  
Note When error logs are read, the error log data currently in computer memory will be  
lost.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select L: Retrievefrom the Error Log Menu. The following window will be  
displayed to prompt you to specify the file to be read.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) of the file to be read. Enter the  
file name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
Press the Enter Key to read the file.  
5-9-6 Saving Error Logs as a File S: Save  
S: Saveis used to save error logs as a file.  
Note 1) Unless saved, all error log data will be lost when the Controller Link Support  
Software is exited.  
2) The error log data saved with this operation is already in the computer  
memory. To save error logs recorded at actual nodes, first read the error log  
to the computer memory using R: Readfrom the Error Log Menu.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select S: Savefrom the Error Log Menu.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) of the file to be saved. Enter  
the file name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
The extension of the file name to be saved must be .CLG. If the extension is  
omitted, .CLG will be automatically assigned as an extension.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
If an existing file name is specified, a confirmation message will be dis-  
played asking you to specify whether the file is to be overwritten. Press Yto  
overwrite the file or press Nto cancel the save processing, then press the  
Enter Key.  
3. Enter a title for the file. Enter the title with Alphanumeric Keys. Up to 30 char-  
acters can be entered as the title. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete Keys  
can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
Press the Enter Key to save. (If no title is required, just press the Enter Key  
without entering a title.)  
5-9-7 Printing Error Logs P: Print  
P: Printis used to print the error log currently in computer memory.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S: Display Node Status  
Section 5-10  
Note For the Controller Link Support Software for DOS, select Printer modelfrom  
the System Setup Menu and specify the printer model before using P: Print.”  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select P: Printfrom the Error Log Menu. The error log will be printed and  
the print status window will be displayed.  
During printing, Printingwill be displayed in the window.  
To cancel the printing, press the F9 (Cancel) Key. When printing for the error  
log has been completed, the print status display window will close and the  
processing will automatically terminate.  
The contents of the error log being printed are the same as those displayed  
on the Error Log Screen.  
5-10 S: Display Node Status  
S: Display Node statusis used to display the operation status and error status  
of the Controller Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board for the specified  
node.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S: Display Node Status  
Section 5-10  
The following information is displayed.  
Item  
Meaning  
Data link (DataLnk)  
Displays the data link operation status.  
Displays the setting error status.  
Error message  
(Error msg)  
Error:  
o
No error:–  
Communications  
controller error  
Displays the error status of the communications controller of  
the Controller Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board.  
(Com controller err)  
Error:  
o
No error:–  
Backup status  
Logging status  
Displays the error information recorded in the Controller  
Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board.  
Error:  
o
No error:–  
Displays the presence or absence of the error log in the  
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board.  
Error log exists:  
No error log exists:  
Y
N
Setting information  
(see note 1)  
Displays the terminating resistor setting status, baud rate  
setting status, and external power supply status of the  
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board.  
Terminating resistor switch (for CS1W-CLK21-E only)  
ON (with terminating resistor):ON  
OFF (without terminating resistor): OFF  
Baud rate (bps) (for CS1W-CLK21-E only)  
2 Mbps:  
1 Mbps:  
500 kbps:  
2M  
1M  
500K  
Power supply status (for optical type only)  
Power is supplied:  
Power is not supplied:  
Y
N
Note 1) Setting information is displayed only when the status of the following nodes  
is read.  
Controller Link Unit for CS1-series PCs: CS1W-CLK21 (wired)  
Controller Link Unit for CS1-series PCs: CS1W-CLK11 (optical)  
Controller Link Unit for CS1-series PCs: CS1W-CLK12 (optical ring)  
Controller Link Support Board for IBM PC/AT or compatible computers:  
3G8F5-CLK11-E (optical)  
2) The Display Node statusfunction can be used only for the Controller Link  
Network. If networks other than Controller Link are specified, the node sta-  
tus will not be displayed normally.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select S: Display Node statusfrom the Main Menu.  
2. Specify the target node. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the de-  
sired field, then enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys. (Use Alphanu-  
meric Keys to enter a PC ID.)  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S: Display Node Status  
Section 5-10  
Press the Enter Key to register the entered value and move the cursor to the  
next field.  
Item  
Meaning  
Enter the PC ID of the node.  
PC ID  
Use this field only when a PC ID is to be used. If a PC ID is  
used, the network address and node address will be  
automatically input (see page 124).  
Network address  
Enter the network address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local network (the address  
of the network containing the node to which the Controller  
Link Support Software is connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series and CV-series PCs with multiple  
Communications Units, specify the network address explicitly.  
Node address  
Enter the node address of the node.  
The setting range is between 0 and 62.  
Node address 0 represents the local node (the address of the  
node to which the Controller Link Support Software is  
connected).  
Note For CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996 (lot No.:  
jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network addressthe  
value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to the Con-  
troller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
Press the F10 (End) Key to close the Node Status window.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M: Maintenance  
Section 5-11  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. The node status of the specified node will be  
read and displayed on the Node Status Screen.  
Wired System  
Optical System  
4. To close the screen, press the F10 (End) Key.  
5-11 M: Maintenance  
M: Maintenanceis used to back up the contents of EEPROM in the Controller  
Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board and initialize the network parameters.  
Use this function for system maintenance, such as replacing faulty Units or  
Boards.  
M: Maintenancehas the following menu.  
Menu item  
Function  
Page  
U: Unit Backup  
Reads the contents of the EEPROM in the  
Controller Link Unit for SYSMAC  
C200HX/HG/HE PCs and saves it as a file or  
writes the contents of a file to the EEPROM in  
the Unit.  
113  
C: Initialize Network  
parameters  
Initializes the network parameters used to  
specify Controller Link Network operation.  
Use this item when the Controller Link  
Network fails to start.  
114  
Note When replacing the Controller Link Unit or Controller Link Support Board, al-  
ways refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) or Controller  
Link Support Boards Operation Manual (W307). After replacing the Unit or  
Board, write the data to the EEPROM with the communications cable discon-  
nected. If the power is turned on or the Controller Link Support Software is  
started with the communications cable connected, the Unit or Board may fail to  
operate normally.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M: Maintenance  
Section 5-11  
5-11-1 Displaying the Maintenance Menu  
To use a maintenance function, select the corresponding item from the Mainte-  
nance Menu. Each function is described on the following pages. The Mainte-  
nance Menu can be displayed as follows:  
Select M: Maintenancefrom the Main Menu. The Maintenance Menu will be  
displayed.  
5-11-2 Backing Up Unit EEPROM U: Unit Backup  
U: Unit Backupis used to read the contents of the EEPROM in C200HX/HG/  
HE Controller Link Units and save it as a file or write the contents of a file back to  
the EEPROM. Since EEPROM contains all settings other than the hardware  
switch settings, always save the contents of the EEPROM in the Controller Link  
Unit before replacing the Unit and then write the data to a new Unit. This will save  
you the trouble of setting up the new Unit.  
Note This function can be used only when the Controller Link Support Software is di-  
rectly connected to a C200HX/HG/HE PC (or connected via modems). It is not  
required for CS1-series or CV-series PCs because the Controller Link Unit set-  
tings are also stored in the SRAM (for CS1-series PCs) or EEPROM (for CV-se-  
ries PCs) in the PC.  
Saving EEPROM —  
S: Unit Computer  
Use the following procedure to write the contents of EEPROM from the Unit to a  
file on the computer.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select U: Unit Backupfrom the Maintenance Menu. If a CV-series or  
CS1-series PC is set as the destination PC in the System Setup, Wrong  
PCwill be displayed.  
The Backup Unit Menu will be displayed.  
2. Select S: Unit Computerfrom the menu.  
3. Specify the file name (including the directory) of the file in which the contents  
of the EEPROM are to be saved. Enter the file name with Alphanumeric  
Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
The extension of the file name to be saved must be .CLU. If the extension is  
omitted, .CLU will be automatically assigned as an extension.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
Press the Enter Key to save the file.  
If an existing file name is specified, a confirmation message will be dis-  
played to ask you to determine whether the file is to be overwritten. Press Y”  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M: Maintenance  
Section 5-11  
to overwrite the file or press Nto cancel the save processing, then press  
the Enter Key.  
Writing EEPROM —  
L: Computer Unit  
Use the following procedure to write the contents of a file on the computer to the  
EEPROM in the Unit.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select U: Unit Backupfrom the Maintenance Menu. If a CV-series or  
CS1-series PC is set as the destination PC in the System Setup, Wrong  
PCwill be displayed.  
The Backup Unit Menu will be displayed.  
2. Select L: Computer Unitfrom the menu.  
3. Specify the file name (including the directory) of the file to be written to the  
EEPROM. Enter the file name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the En-  
ter Key.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
4. Press the Enter Key to write the EEPROM.  
5-11-3 Initializing Network Parameters C: Initialize Network  
Parameters  
C: Initialize Network parametersis used to initialize the network parameters for  
the Controller Link Unit installed in the PC connected to the Controller Link Sup-  
port Software or for the Controller Link Support Board installed in the computer  
on which the Controller Link Support Software is running.  
Use this function when the Controller Link Network fails to start.  
Execute this function for the Controller Link Units or Controller Link Support  
Boards that have been set as polling nodes.  
Initializing the network parameters returns the settings to the following defaults.  
Parameters  
Default  
Max node address  
62 (see note 1)  
# of Event-frames per comm cycle  
# of Polled nodes per comm cycle  
35  
4
Note 1) The default setting for the maximum node address for Controller Link Units  
other than Optical Ring type Controller Link Units is 32.  
2) Even if the network parameters are initialized, the current parameter set-  
tings will not be changed during the operation.  
3) If the Controller Link Support Software is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE  
PC, the Unit specified in PC interfaceof the System Setup Menu will be  
initialized.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select C: Initialize Network parametersfrom the Maintenance Menu.  
If a CV-series or CS1-series PC is specified as the destination PC in the Sys-  
tem Setup, the following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify a  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
Unit number. Otherwise, a confirmation window for initialization will be dis-  
played immediately.  
Enter the desired Unit number with Numeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
The following confirmation window will be displayed to ask you to confirm  
whether the network parameters are to be initialized.  
2. To initialize the network parameters, press Yand then the Enter Key. The  
network parameters will be initialized.  
To cancel the initialization processing, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
5-12 K: Connection Information  
Use K: Connection Informationto display information on node configurations,  
connection order, and the number of communications errors for the Optical Ring  
Controller Link Network.  
K: Connection Informationhas the following menu.  
Item  
Function  
Page  
R: Read  
Reads and displays the  
connection information for  
the specified node. Can  
also be used to clear the  
connection information  
(disconnection  
119  
information) currently  
displayed.  
L: Retrieve  
S: Save  
Reads connection  
information saved in files  
to computer memory.  
122  
122  
123  
Saves connection  
information in computer  
memory to files.  
P: Print  
Prints connection  
information currently in  
computer memory.  
Note These functions can only be used with Optical Ring Controller Link Networks.  
5-12-1 About Connection Information  
Connection information is collected from all nodes in a specified Optical Ring  
Controller Link Network, and includes data about node configurations and the  
number of errors.  
Information Displayed  
There are 2 display screens for connection information. The information dis-  
played is different for the 2 screens as shown in the following table.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
Screen  
Information displayed  
Frame Information Screen  
Disconnect detection node data  
Backup power supply status (for each  
node)  
Time when disconnect data recording  
commenced (for each node)  
Local node disconnect detection status  
(for each node; Yes: detected; No dis-  
play: nothing detected)  
Number of frame drop-outs (for each  
node and connector)  
Number of frame breaks detected (for  
each node and connector)  
Number of CRC errors detected (for  
each node and connector)  
Controller Link Unit model (for each  
node)  
Connection Information Screen  
Disconnect detection node data  
Backup power supply status (for each  
node)  
Time when disconnect data recording  
commenced (for each node)  
Local node disconnect detection status  
(for each node)  
Number of node/network separations  
(for each node)  
Number of network disconnections (for  
each node)  
Number of local node disconnections  
(for each node)  
Maximum number of consecutive dis-  
connect cycles (for each node)  
Note For details of the above items, refer to the explanations for the NETWORK DIS-  
CONNECT DATA READ command in Section 6 of the Optical Ring Controller  
Link Units Operation Manual (W370).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
Node Display Order  
The node information in the Network Configuration Screens can be displayed in  
either of the orders given below.  
Display order  
Node address order  
Description  
Displays information based on the  
network participation status recorded in  
specified nodes in increasing order of  
node address.  
Nodes for which the network  
participation status is to be read are  
specified while the display order is  
connection order. For this reason, when  
this Network Configuration Screen is  
displayed for the first time after starting  
up the Controller Link Support Software,  
only the information for the node to  
which the Controller Link Support  
Software is connected will be displayed.  
Connection order  
Displays information starting with the  
specified node in order of connection  
(i.e., going in the direction of the SL2  
connector side of the specified node).  
Pairs of connectors (SL1/SL2) that are  
connected are indicated by the same  
color. When this Network Configuration  
Screen is displayed for the first time after  
starting up the Controller Link Support  
Software, the node to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is  
connected will be displayed at the top of  
the screen.  
Display Example  
Display order  
Frame Information Screen  
Connection Information Screen  
Node address order  
Connection order  
Reading and Displaying Information from Nodes  
The way in which the information displayed in the Network Configuration  
Screens is read from the nodes, is given below.  
Reading Process  
The information is obtained according to the following process.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Reading the Connection Mode from the Base Node  
This is performed by sending the CONTROLLER DATA READ command. If  
not in token ring mode, an error will occur, and an error message will be dis-  
played.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
The base node is the node that reads the connection mode and network par-  
ticipation status, and checks the integrity of the connection order read from  
the nodes.  
The base node is specified as the Nd# orderwhen the nodes are displayed  
in connection order. When connection information is displayed for the first  
time, the base node is the node to which the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware is connected.  
2. Reading the Network Participation Status from the Base Node  
This is performed by sending the CONTROLLER STATUS READ com-  
mand. The nodes that are participating in the network are identified from this  
information, and a Network Participation List is created. When reading  
information from allnodes, reading is, in fact, executed only for nodes that  
are registered on this list.  
3. Reading Information from All Nodes  
This is performed by sending the CONNECTION DATA READ, NETWORK  
DISCONNECT DATA READ, and CONTROLLER DATA READ commands.  
All the information required for the Network Configuration Screens is read.  
Screen Display when Information is not Concurrent  
While a node is participating in a Controller Link Network, its network participa-  
tion status is constantly being updated. If the network is in token ring mode and  
there is a normal ring connection status, the connection information, along with  
the time at which it was created, is updated with every communications cycle. If  
the ring becomes disconnected, the information updated immediately before the  
disconnection will be maintained. If there is disconnection in only one place,  
information can still be read in the normal way, but if a node is separated or  
added during disconnection, the information will not be concurrent.  
Non-participating Nodes  
A non-participating node is a node that is not in the Network Participation List,  
but is in the connection order information for the base node. This kind of node  
was separated from the network after the connection information for the base  
node had been created. Read errorwill be displayed in Start time of mea-  
surefor any such node. Information will not be read for any non-participating  
nodes, and there will be nothing displayed for any of the information items.  
When a Network Configuration Screen is displayed in connection order, the  
node will be displayed according to the order recorded in the base node. This  
situation is caused in token ring mode by a node leaving the network while the  
line is disconnected.  
Logical Error  
A logical error will occur when a there is a node that is in the Network Participa-  
tion List, but not in the connection order information for the base node. This  
kind of node entered the network after the connection information for the base  
node has been created. The node address of any node with a logical error will  
be displayed with a #sign attached to it. Because it exists in the Network Par-  
ticipation List, all information is displayed. When a Network Configuration  
Screen is displayed in connection order, the order of connection is unclear, so  
the node will be displayed at the end (with no color differentiation for SL1 and  
SL2). This situation is caused in token ring mode by a node joining the network  
while the line is disconnected.  
Verify Error  
A verify error will occur when there is a node that is in the Network Participation  
List and in the connection order information for the base node but for which  
there is a discrepancy in the connection order information. The node address  
for any node with a verify error will be displayed with an asterisk. All information  
is displayed, and the information on a Network Configuration Screen will be  
displayed in the connection order recorded in the base node. SL1 and SL2,  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
however, will not be highlighted in different colors. This situation is caused by  
repeated disconnection and reconnection in token ring mode resulting in dis-  
crepancies in the connection information collected from the nodes.  
Screen Display for Disconnected Nodes  
Above the tables in the Network Configuration Screens, the status of disconnec-  
tions at that time, and the disconnection log (information on detected node dis-  
connections) recorded in the base node are displayed in the following way.  
Normal Ring (Logged: Node10:SL1 Node12:SL2)  
Information on dis-  
connected node 2  
Node address and con-  
nector where discon-  
nection occurred  
Information on dis-  
connected node 1  
Network disconnection status  
Normal ring: Communications normal  
Disconnecting: Disconnection  
Information on disconnected nodes is not cleared when connection is  
restored. For this reason, there may be times when a log is displayed even  
though the network disconnection status indicates normal communications.  
Note If there is a disconnection in one place only, the connection informa-  
tion may not be concurrent, but there will be no adverse effect on data  
communications. In this case, identify the location of the disconnec-  
tion using the disconnection log, and remove the cause of the discon-  
nection. For details, refer to information on notification and counter-  
measures for network disconnections in the Optical Ring Controller  
Link Units Operation Manual (W370).  
5-12-2 Displaying the Connection Information Menu  
(Network Configuration)  
To read, display, save, load and print connect information, select the required  
function from the Connection Information (Network Configuration) Menu and  
perform the relevant procedure. These procedures are explained over the next  
few pages. The method for displaying the Connection Information (Network  
Configuration) Menu is given here.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select K: Connection Informationfrom the Main Menu. The Connection  
Information (Network Configuration) Menu will be displayed.  
The Connection Information (Network Configuration) Menu can be dis-  
played from a Network Configuration Screen by pressing the F2 (Submenu)  
Key.  
5-12-3 Reading Connection Information R: Read  
R: Readis used to read and display the connection information for a specified  
network.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select R: Readfrom the Connection Information (Network Configuration)  
Menu. The following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify the  
network to be read.  
[Read Network configurations]  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
2. Specify the target network. Enter a numeric value with Numeric Keys.  
Item  
Meaning  
Network address  
Enter the network address.  
The setting range is between 0 and 127.  
Network address 0 represents the local  
network (the address of the network  
containing the node to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is  
connected). (see note)  
For CS1-series and CV-series PCs with  
multiple Communications Units, specify  
the network address explicitly.  
Note For CV-series CPU Units manufactured before April 1996 (lot No.:  
jj46), always set routing tables. Specify in Network addressthe  
value (other than 0) specified in the routing tables. Refer to the Con-  
troller Link Units Operation Manual (W309) for details.  
The Network Configuration Screen can be closed by pressing the F10 (End)  
Key.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. The connection information will be read from  
the specified network and displayed on the screen.  
While information is being read from a node, the node number is displayed at the  
bottom of the screen.  
Reading of connection information can be stopped by pressing the F10 (End)  
Key.  
If the nodes are displayed in connection order, the first node can be specified by  
moving the cursor to Nd# orderat the top of the screen and inputting a node  
address. (This node will then become the base node.)  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
Key  
Function  
F3 (Nd ordr)  
F3 (Cn ordr)  
Switches the display to node address  
order. Once the display has changed to  
node address order, the display for this  
key changes to Cn order.”  
Switches the display to connection order.  
Once the display has changed to  
connection order, the display for this key  
changes to Nd ordr.”  
F4 (Pre Pg)  
F5 (Nxt Pg)  
F6 (Execute)  
Displays the previous screen.  
Displays the next screen.  
Refreshes the connection information  
displayed.  
When the display is in connection order,  
if this key is pressed after changing the  
base node, the display will change so  
that this node is displayed at thetop.  
In other cases, this key can be used to  
re-execute a command and refresh the  
display. In this case, if information that is  
read from the network is not saved, a  
confirmation message will be displayed.  
Press Yand then the Enter Key to start  
reading and displaying the information.  
To cancel the operation, press Nand  
then the Enter Key.  
F7 (Clear)  
Clears all the connection information at a  
specified node. (Refer to Clearing  
Connection Information below.)  
F8 (Connect)  
Switches to the Connection Information  
Screen. Once the screen has changed,  
the display for this key changes to  
Frame.”  
F8 (Frame)  
Switches to the Frame Information  
Screen. Once the screen has changed,  
the display for this key changes to  
Connect.”  
F9 (Help)  
Displays a help window for comparison  
errors and logic errors. Only available  
when the display is in connection order.  
F9 (Cancel)  
The display for this key changes to  
Cancelwhen the F6 (Execute) Key is  
pressed. Use this key to cancel reading  
of node information executed by  
pressing the F6 (Execute) Key. This key  
can also be used to cancel execution  
when a confirmation window is displayed  
after F6 (Execute) is pressed.  
F10 (End)  
Cancels reading of information from  
nodes and clearing of information, and  
exits the Network Configuration Screen.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
Clearing Connection  
Information  
When a Network Configuration Screen is displayed, it is possible to clear the  
connection information (disconnection information) recorded in several nodes in  
one operation.  
When a Network Configuration Screen is displayed, press F7 (Clear) to display  
the following window. This window is for selecting the nodes for which informa-  
tion is to be cleared.  
Select nodes for which connection information is to be cleared by moving the  
cursor to that node and pressing the Enter Key. YESindicates that information  
will be cleared for this node whereas no display indicates that information will not  
be cleared. If the cursor is moved to a YESand the Enter Key is pressed, the  
YESwill disappear.  
Press the F6 (Execute) Key. A window for confirming whether the information  
should be cleared or not will be displayed. Press either Y(to clear) or N(to  
cancel) and press the Enter Key. The operation can also be cancelled by press-  
ing the F9 (Cancel) Key.  
5-12-4 Reading Connection Information from a File L: Retrieve  
L: Retrieveis used to read connection information from files to computer  
memory.  
Note When connection information is read from a file, any connection information cur-  
rently in computer memory will be lost.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select L: Retrievefrom the Connection Information (Network Configura-  
tion) Menu. The following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify  
the file to be read.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) of the file to be read. Enter the  
file name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
Press the Enter Key to read the file.  
5-12-5 Saving Connection Information as a File S: Save  
S: Saveis used to save connection information as a file.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
K: Connection Information  
Section 5-12  
Note 1) Unless saved, all connection information will be lost when the Controller  
Link Support Software is exited.  
2) The connection information saved with this operation is already in the com-  
puter memory. To save connection information recorded at actual nodes,  
first read the connection information to the computer memory using R:  
Readfrom the Connection Information (Network Configuration) Menu.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select S: Savefrom the Connection Information (Network Configuration)  
Menu.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) of the file to be saved. Enter  
the file name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
The extension of the file name to be saved must be .CNI. If the extension is  
omitted, .CNI will be automatically assigned as an extension.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
If an existing file name is specified, a confirmation message will be dis-  
played asking you to specify whether the file is to be overwritten. Press Yto  
overwrite the file or press Nto cancel the save processing, then press the  
Enter Key.  
3. Enter a title for the file. Enter the title with Alphanumeric Keys. Up to 30 char-  
acters can be entered as the title. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete Keys  
can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
Press the Enter Key to save. (If no title is required, just press the Enter Key  
without entering a title.)  
5-12-6 Printing Connection Information P: Print  
P: Printis used to print the connection information currently in computer  
memory.  
Note For the Controller Link Support Software for DOS, select Printer modelfrom  
the System Setup Menu and specify the printer model before using P: Print.”  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select P: Printfrom the Connection Information (Network Configuration)  
Menu. The error log will be printed and the print status window will be dis-  
played.  
During printing, Printingwill be displayed in the window.  
To cancel the printing, press the F9 (Cancel) Key. When printing for the error  
log has been completed, the print status display window will close and the  
processing will automatically terminate.  
The order (i.e., connection order or node address order) in which the  
information is printed will be the same as the current display. Frame error  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
information and cable disconnection information are printed simulta-  
neously.  
Node Address Order  
Connection Order  
5-13 W: Edit PC ID  
W: Edit PC IDis used to assign a PC ID to nodes on the Controller Link Net-  
work. This section describes how to register and use PC IDs.  
W: Edit PC IDhas the following menu.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
Menu item  
S: Save PC ID  
Function  
Page  
129  
Saves PC ID data as a file.  
L: Retrieve PC ID  
Reads PC ID data from a file into the  
memory.  
129  
No PC IDs are set when the Controller Link  
Support Software is started. To use PC IDs,  
the PC ID file must be read into the memory.  
F: FILL  
Writes the same data into the specified range 130  
of nodes displayed on the PC ID Edit Screen.  
This item can be used to specify the same  
network address for multiple nodes at a time  
or to specify similar PC IDs for multiple  
nodes.  
C: Clear  
Clears data in the specified range of nodes  
displayed on the PC ID Edit Screen.  
131  
P: Print  
Prints PC ID data.  
131  
132  
K: Check  
Checks PC ID data for errors or  
inconsistencies and displays any errors.  
O: Sort  
R: Find  
Sorts PC ID data on the PC ID Edit Screen in 133  
the following sequence:  
Numeric uppercase lowercase  
Searches the specified PC ID data. The node 134  
corresponding to the specified PC ID or the  
PC ID corresponding to the specified node  
can be found.  
5-13-1 About PC IDs  
A PC ID is a name assigned to a node on the Controller Link Network.  
If a PC ID is registered, the node can be specified using the PC ID instead of the  
network and node addresses.  
Note 1) PC IDs are set only for convenience in using the Controller Link Support  
Software and are not set at the nodes themselves.  
2) PC ID files for the Controller Link Support Software are compatible with  
those for the SYSMAC Support Software and the SYSMAC LINK Support  
Utility. Therefore, PC ID files can be transferred between them.  
Specifying PC IDs  
Assign an easy-to-remember PC ID to each node, such as in the following exam-  
ple.  
Controller Link Network  
(network 1)  
Controller Link Network  
(network 2)  
(bridge node)  
Node address 1 Node address 2  
Node address 1 Node address 2 Node address 3  
Process1”  
Node address 4  
Control”  
Assemble”  
Process2”  
Build”  
Check”  
Node address 3  
Inspect”  
Node address 10  
No name  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
PC IDs are registered in the following format.  
Up to eight alphanumeric characters can be specified as a PC ID, and PC IDs  
are case-sensitive.  
Up to 500 PC IDs can be registered in the Controller Link Support Software.  
Only one PC ID can be assigned to each node and the same PC ID cannot be  
assigned to more than one node.  
Note More than one PC ID can be assigned to a PC node (such as a bridge node) in  
which multiple Communications Units are installed. To avoid confusion, howev-  
er, avoid doing so wherever possible.  
Using PC IDs  
If the current window contains a PC ID input field when you specify a node, spec-  
ify the PC ID in the field, then press the Enter Key. The network and node ad-  
dresses corresponding to the specified PC ID will be automatically entered.  
Enter Inspectin the  
PC ID input field.  
5-13-2 Displaying the PC ID Edit Screen  
Select W: Edit PC IDfrom the Main Menu. The PC ID Edit Screen will be dis-  
played.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
The W: Edit PC IDfunction provides the following three modes.  
Mode  
Read  
Function  
Displays all registered PC IDs.  
Press the F4 (Read) Key to enter read mode.  
Registers PC IDs.  
Write  
Press the F3 (Write) Key to enter write mode.  
Changes registered PC IDs.  
Change  
Press the F5 (Change) Key enter change mode.  
5-13-3 Creating and Editing PC IDs  
Reading PC IDs (Read  
Mode)  
Press the F4 (Read) Key at the PC ID Edit Screen. Read mode will be entered.  
If you press the F4 (Read) Key in read or change mode, the first page of the PC  
ID Edit Screen will be displayed when read mode is entered.  
To display the desired page, press the F6 (Page) Key, enter the page number,  
then press the Enter Key.  
To move the cursor to the desired line, press the F7 (Row No.) Key, enter the line  
number, then press the Enter Key.  
Writing PC IDs (Write  
Mode)  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the F3 (Write) Key at the PC ID Edit Screen. Write mode will be en-  
tered.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
The cursor will be positioned on the first blank line.  
The three input fields will be displayed in the lower part of the screen. Press  
the Escape Key to return to the previous input field.  
2. Specify the desired network address in the input field. Enter the network ad-  
dress with Numeric Keys, then press the Enter Key. The setting range is be-  
tween 0 and 127. 0represents the local network.  
3. Specify the desired node address in the input field. Enter the network ad-  
dress with Numeric Keys, then press the Enter Key. The setting range is be-  
tween 0 and 126. 0represents the local node. However, 0 can be specified  
as the node address only when 0 is specified as the network address.  
4. Specify the desired PC ID in the input field. Enter the PC ID with Alphanu-  
meric Keys, then press the Enter Key. Up to eight characters can be speci-  
fied as a PC ID. Press the Enter Key to write the entered data on the cursor  
line and move the cursor to the next line.  
The Insert, Backspace, and Delete Keys can be used to correct the charac-  
ters displayed. Then, you can write the next data as required.  
Changing PC IDs  
(Change Mode)  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the F5 (Change) Key at the PC ID Edit Screen. Change mode will be  
entered.  
To display the desired page, press the F6 (Page) Key, enter the page num-  
ber (screen number), then press the Enter Key.  
To move the cursor to the desired line, press the F7 (Row No.) Key, enter the  
line number, then press the Enter Key.  
The first page can be displayed by pressing the Escape Key while holding  
down the Shift Key.  
2. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the data to be changed, then  
press the Enter Key. The data on the cursor line will be displayed in the input  
fields in the lower part of the screen, and you can change the value in each  
input field.  
The three input fields will be displayed in the lower part of the screen. Press  
the Escape Key to return to the previous input field.  
3. Change the network address, node address, and PC ID as required. The  
input method is the same as for write mode.  
Press the Enter Key in the PC ID input field to writes the entered values on  
the cursor line. You can now go back to step 1. and move the cursor on the  
screen.  
Then, you can change the next data as required.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
5-13-4 Displaying the Edit PC ID Menu  
To use an Edit PC ID function, select the corresponding item from the Edit PC ID  
Menu. Each function is described on the following pages. The Edit PC ID Menu  
can be displayed as follows:  
Press the F2 (Menu) Key at the PC ID Edit Screen. The Edit PC ID Menu will be  
displayed.  
5-13-5 Saving PC ID Data as a File S: Save PC ID  
S: Save PC IDis used to save created or edited PC ID data as a file.  
Note 1) Unless saved, all PC ID data will be lost when the Controller Link Support  
Software is exited.  
2) If PC ID data has been modified but has not yet been saved as a file, a con-  
firmation message will be displayed when you attempt to exit the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
3) PC ID files for the Controller Link Support Software are compatible with  
those for the SYSMAC Support Software. Therefore, PC ID files can be  
transferred between them.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select S: Save PC IDfrom the Edit PC ID Menu.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) to be saved. Enter the file  
name with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter Key.  
The extension of the file name to be saved must be .PCN. If the extension is  
omitted, .PCN will be automatically assigned as an extension.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
If an existing file name is specified, a confirmation message will be dis-  
played to ask you to determine whether the file is to be overwritten. Press Y”  
to overwrite the file or press Nto cancel the save processing, then press  
the Enter Key.  
3. Enter a title for the file. Enter the title with Alphanumeric Keys. Up to 30 char-  
acters can be entered as the title. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete Keys  
can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
If no title is required, just press the Enter Key.  
Press the Enter Key to save.  
5-13-6 Reading PC ID Data from a File L: Retrieve PC ID  
L: Retrieve PC IDis used to read PC ID data from a file.  
No PC IDs are set when the Controller Link Support Software is started. To use  
PC ID data that has been created before, the PC ID data must be read from the  
file beforehand.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
Note 1) If PC ID data is read from the file, the current PC ID data will be lost. To save  
the PC ID data, execute S: Save PC IDon the Edit PC ID Menu (page 129).  
2) If PC ID data has been modified, a confirmation message will be displayed  
when you attempt to read another PC ID data from the file.  
3) PC ID files for the Controller Link Support Software are compatible with  
those for the SYSMAC Support Software. Therefore, PC ID files can be  
transferred between them.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select L: Retrieve PC IDfrom the Edit PC ID Menu. Then, if PC ID data has  
been modified, a confirmation window will be displayed to ask you whether  
the read processing is to be continued. Press Yto continue the read pro-  
cessing or press Nto cancel the processing, then press the Enter Key.  
If the PC ID data has not been modified or Yis pressed to continue the read  
processing, the following window will be displayed to prompt you to specify  
the file to be read.  
2. Specify the file name (including the directory) to be read. Enter a title with  
Alphanumeric Keys.  
When this window appears, the data directory specified in the System Setup  
will be displayed as the destination. The Insert, Backspace, and Delete  
Keys can be used to correct the characters displayed.  
You can press the F8 (Files) Key to display the File Name List Screen and  
then select a file name from the screen.  
Press the Enter Key to read.  
5-13-7 Specifying Multiple Nodes F: FILL  
F: FILLis used to batch set the same data for the specified range of nodes dis-  
played on the PC ID Edit Screen.  
Batch setting can be used to specify only one input field (network address, node  
address, or PC ID) at a time.  
Batch setting can be used to specify the same network address for multiple  
nodes or specify similar PC IDs for multiple nodes.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select F: FILLfrom the Edit PC ID Menu.  
2. Specify the data type, range, and data, then press the Enter Key.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
Item  
Meaning  
Input type to fill  
Use a Numeric Key to specify one of the following items.  
0: Network address  
1: Node address  
2: PC ID  
Specify range to fill  
Input data to fill  
Specify the first and last line numbers of the range of nodes  
for which the data is to be set.  
The setting range is between 1 and 500.  
Specify the data to be set for the specified item.  
The setting range differs according to the item to be set.  
See Writing PC IDs (Write Mode).  
Press the Enter Key or F6 (Execute) Key with the cursor in the Input data to  
fillfield to execute the batch setting.  
5-13-8 Clearing Multiple PC IDs C: Clear  
C: Clearis used to clear (or delete) the specified range of PC ID data on the PC  
ID Edit Screen.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select C: Clearfrom the Edit PC ID Menu.  
2. Specify the first and last line numbers of the range of PC ID data to be  
cleared. Specify the first and last line numbers with Numeric Keys, then  
press the Enter Key. The setting range is between 1 and 500.  
When the Enter Key is pressed with the cursor in the last line number input  
field, a confirmation message will be displayed to ask you to confirm wheth-  
er the PC ID data is to be cleared.  
3. To clear the PC ID data, press Yand then the Enter Key. The specified  
range of PC ID data will be cleared and the lines following the cleared lines  
will be moved up to fill the gap.  
To cancel the processing, press Nand then the Enter Key.  
5-13-9 Printing PC ID Data P: Print  
P: Printis used to print PC ID data.  
Note For the Controller Link Support Software for DOS, select Printer modelfrom  
the System Setup Menu and specify the printer model before using P: Print.”  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Make sure that the computer on which the Controller Link Support Software  
is currently running is connected to the printer and the printer is ready to op-  
erate.  
2. Select P: Printfrom the Edit PC ID Menu. The PC ID data will be printed  
and the print status window will be displayed.  
During printing, Printingwill be displayed in the window.  
To cancel the printing, press the F9 (Cancel) Key. After the data that has al-  
ready been sent to the printer buffer is printed, printing will stop.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
The PC ID data being printed is the same as that displayed on the PC ID Edit  
Screen. The PC ID data will be printed sequentially from the first line.  
Printing Example  
PC ID Data List  
11/12/96  
PAGE = 001  
PC ID  
Line Netwk node  
PC ID  
Line Netwk node  
PC ID  
Line Netwk node  
Process1  
Assemble  
Inspect  
Control  
Process2  
Build  
Check  
5-13-10Checking PC ID Data K: Check  
K: Checkis used to check the PC ID data for duplicate entries.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select K: Checkfrom the Edit PC ID Menu. PC ID data check processing  
will start and a message will appear to indicate the check is being per-  
formed. When the check processing is completed, the check result screen  
will be displayed.  
A message will be displayed in the lower part of the screen according to the  
check results as follows:  
When no error has been detected: Check OK”  
When errors were found:  
Check complete”  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
2. When errors are displayed on multiple screens, use the F4 (Pre Pg) Key, the  
F5 (Nxt Pg) Key, the Page Up Key, or the Page Down Key to switch the  
screen and display the check results.  
3. After confirming the check results, press the F10 (End) Key.  
If errors have been found, correct the faulty data on the PC ID Edit Screen in  
change mode and check the PC ID data again.  
5-13-11 Sorting PC ID Data O: Sort  
O: Sortis used to sort PC ID data. It can sort PC ID data that has been ar-  
ranged in disorganized order due to repeated editing.  
Select O: Sortfrom the Edit PC ID Menu. Sort processing will be performed as  
follows:  
1, 2, 3...  
1. PC ID data will be sorted in ascending order of network address.  
2. PC ID data with the same network address will be sorted in ascending order  
of node address.  
3. PC ID data with the same network and node addresses will be sorted in the  
following order of PC ID:  
Numbersuppercase characters lowercase characters  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W: Edit PC ID  
Section 5-13  
5-13-12Searching PC ID Data R: Find  
R: Findis used to search the specified PC ID data.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select R: Findfrom the Edit PC ID Menu.  
2. Use the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the desired search item, enter the  
data to be searched for in the applicable field (Netwk, Node, or PC ID), and  
then press the Enter Key.  
3. Press the F6 (Execute) Key. Searching will start and the cursor will move to  
the line that matches the specified data.  
If the specified data is not found, No such datawill be displayed in the up-  
per left part of the screen and searching will terminate.  
4. Press the F6 (Execute) Key again to search for the next occurrence of the  
specified data. Search processing can be continued until all the lines that  
match the specified data are found.  
To cancel searching, press the F10 (End) Key.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I: System Setup  
Section 5-14  
5-14 I: System Setup  
I: System Setupis used to set the communications between the Controller Link  
Support Software and the PC, service conditions for the Controller Link Support  
Software, and so on.  
5-14-1 About the System Setup  
The System Setup Menu has the following functions.  
Item  
Function  
Page  
C: PC interface  
Sets the type of the PC to be connected, and 137  
the communications method and  
communication parameters to be used when  
the Controller Link Support Software  
connects to the PC.  
This item must be set when the Controller  
Link Support Software connects to a PC.  
T: Watchdog Timer  
Sets the maximum node response time within 140  
which the node must send a response to an  
instruction sent by the Controller Link Support  
Software.  
If the Controller Link Support Software does  
not receive a response from the node within  
the specified time, a response timeout error  
will occur.  
P: Printer model  
D: Data disk drv  
Sets the printer model to be connected to the 141  
Controller Link Support Software.  
Sets the drive and directory to/from which  
data is to be written or read.  
141  
The specified drive and directory will be used  
as the default drive and directory for file  
operations.  
The settings in the System Setup Menu will be automatically saved as a file and  
stored in the directory in which the Controller Link Support Software was  
installed. Once the System Setup Menu is set, it need not be reset until the des-  
tination PC or printer is changed.  
Note The current settings will be displayed on the right side of each item in the System  
Setup Window.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I: System Setup  
Section 5-14  
Screen Transitions  
Screen transitions are shown below.  
V Key, S Key  
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Press the Escape Key at any screen to return to the  
previous screen. Selecting an item on the screen  
marked with bullets (D) also returns to the previous  
screen.  
D
5-14-2 Displaying the System Setup I: System Setup  
To perform System Setup, select the desired item from the System Setup win-  
dow. Each item is described on the following pages. The System Setup window  
can be displayed as follows:  
SelectI: System Setupfrom the Main Menu. The System Setup window will be  
displayed.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I: System Setup  
Section 5-14  
5-14-3 Setting PC Communications C: PC Interface  
C: PC interfaceis used to set the PC to be connected, the communications  
method, and the communication conditions to be used when the Controller Link  
Support Software connects to the PC.  
Normally, the Controller Link Support Software uses the settings only when it  
connects to the PC. However, it also refers to the settings of the destination PC  
Menu when Maintenance functions are used. Therefore, set the PC interface  
correctly before transferring data between the Controller Link Support Software  
and a node or before using Maintenance functions.  
Note For settings on the PC, see 3-3-2 PC Settings (page 25).  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I: System Setup  
Section 5-14  
Settings  
The setting items in PC interfaceare shown in the following table  
Setting  
Description  
Peripheral  
Host Link  
C: PC interface  
Select the method of communications with the PC. The  
communications parameters to be used differ according to the selected  
communications method.  
Peripheral Bus  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to the  
peripheral port on the CPU Unit, select Peripheral.Peripheral port  
communications parameters can be specified for C200HX/HG/HE,  
CQM1H PCs. When the Controller Link Support Software is connected  
to the peripheral port, always select the standard settings.  
Host Link  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to the  
RS-232C or RS-422A port on the CPU Unit or a Host Link Unit, select  
Host Link.”  
Destination PC  
Specify the PC to be connected to the Controller Link Support  
Software.  
Set  
Set  
C-series PCs  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to a  
C200HX/HG/HE, CQM1H PC, select C series,and then select either  
operating level 0 or operating level 1. Set the same operating level as  
the Controller Link Unit installed in the PC. Be sure to select operating  
level 0 if it is to be connected to a CQM1H PC.  
CV-series PCs  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to a  
CV-series PC, select CVM1/CV series.”  
CS1 Series  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to a CS1 PC,  
select CS1 series.”  
Communications Select the RS-232C port to be used (COM1 to COM4).  
port  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Baud rate  
Select the baud rate to be used for communications with the PC.  
Set the same baud rate as the setting at the PC.  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to a CVM1  
or CV-series PC, set a baud rate of at least 4,800 bps, and if it is to be  
connected to a CS1-series PC, set a baud rate of at least 9,600 bps.  
Unit No.  
Specify the Host Link Unit number of the remote node.  
Not set  
Set  
The unit number is used to identify the Host Link Unit when multiple  
Host Link Units are connected to the Controller Link Support Software.  
If the Controller Link Support Software is connected to a Host Link Unit  
on the one-to-one basis, 00can be specified. If the Host Link Unit  
number of the remote node is not 00, specify the same Unit number as  
that of the remote node.  
Parity  
Select the parity check method to be used for communications data  
error detection.  
Not set  
Set  
Specify the same parity check method as that set at the PC.  
Select the bit length of communications data.  
Data length  
Stop bits  
Not set  
Not set  
Set  
Set  
Specify the same data length as that set at the PC.  
Select the stop bit length to be used to identify data boundaries.  
Specify the same stop bit length as that set at the PC.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I: System Setup  
Section 5-14  
Peripheral Bus  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select P: PC interfacefrom the System Setup window.  
2. Select T: PeripheralThe Peripheral Bus Window will be displayed.  
3. Select the item to be changed. The window corresponding to the item to be  
changed will be displayed.  
Destination PC  
Communications Port  
Baud Rate  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to a CVM1 or CV-  
series PC, set a baud rate of at least 4,800 bps, and if it is to be connected to  
a CS1-series PC, set a baud rate of at least 9,600 bps.  
4. Select the desired setting from the window.  
5. If a C-series PC is selected as the destination PC, the following window will  
be displayed to prompt you to select the operating level of the Controller Link  
Unit to be used.  
If a CQM1H is selected as the PC, be sure to select operation level 0.  
6. If another item is also to be set, press the Escape Key to return to the pre-  
vious screen.  
Host Link  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select C: PC interfacefrom the System Setup Window.  
2. Select J: Host Link.The Host Link window will be displayed.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I: System Setup  
Section 5-14  
3. Select the item to be changed. The window corresponding to the item to be  
changed will be displayed.  
Destination PC  
Communications Port  
Baud Rate  
Unit No.  
Parity  
Data Bits  
Stop Bits  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be connected to a CVM1 or CV-  
series PC, set a baud rate of at least 4,800 bps, and if it is to be connected to  
a CS1-series PC, set a baud rate of at least 9,600 bps.  
4. Select the desired setting from the window. In the Unit No. Window, use Nu-  
meric Keys to enter a number between 00 and 31, then press the Enter Key.  
In windows other than the Unit No. Window, select one of the settings.  
5. If a C-series PC is selected as the destination PC, the following window will  
be displayed to prompt you to select the operating level of the Controller Link  
Unit to be used.  
If a CQM1H is selected as the PC, be sure to select operation level 0.  
6. If another item is also to be set, press the Escape Key to return to the pre-  
vious screen.  
5-14-4 Setting the Node Response Time T: Watchdog Timer  
If an error occurs during communications between the Controller Link Support  
Software and a node, the node may not be able to send a response to a request  
sent by the Controller Link Support Software. T: Watchdog timeris used to set  
the maximum node response time to be monitored. Failure to send a response  
within this time will be treated as an error.  
Note 1) If the node does not send a response within the maximum node response  
time, a response timeout error will occur and an error message will be dis-  
played.  
2) Normally, the maximum node response time can be set to the default (5 se-  
conds). If, however, a response timeout error frequently occurs, take one of  
the following actions:  
Increase the maximum node response time.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I: System Setup  
Section 5-14  
Increase the value specified in the # of Event-frames per comm cycle”  
field in the Set Network Parameters Window.  
Review the node configuration and the communications intervals to re-  
duce the volume of traffic on the entire network.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select T: Watchdog timerfrom the System Setup window.  
2. Specify the maximum node response time. Use Numeric Keys to enter a val-  
ue in Units of second, then press the Enter Key. The setting range is be-  
tween 2 and 25.  
If another item is also to be set, press the Escape Key to return to the pre-  
vious screen.  
5-14-5 Setting the Printer Model P: Printer Model  
P: Printer modelis used to specify the printer model (or printer control code  
type) to be used with the Controller Link Support Software.  
The following printers can be used according to the type of the personal comput-  
er used. Use a printer that can execute the following emulation.  
Printer  
HP Laser Jet 4P  
IBM 4202-003  
Printer specification  
PCL2  
Printer model  
HP Laser Jet  
IBM  
Wide Carriage Graphics  
Compressed Graphics  
EPSON MJ-500  
ESC/P  
Compressed Graphics  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select P: Printer modelfrom the System Setup window. The printer model  
window will be displayed.  
2. Select the desired setting from the window.  
3. If another item is also to be set, press the Escape Key to return to the pre-  
vious screen.  
5-14-6 Setting the Data Directory D: Data Disk Drive  
D: Data disk drvis used to specify the drive and directory from/to which the  
Controller Link Support Software is to read and write file data.  
The specified drive and directory will be used as the default drive and directory  
from/to which data is to be read or written. (You can also specify another drive or  
directory when writing or reading data.) If a nonexistent drive or directory is spe-  
cified, an error will occur when you attempt to write or read data.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Select D: Data disk drvfrom the System Setup window. The following win-  
dow will be displayed to prompt you to specify the default drive and directory.  
2. Specify the drive and directory names of the default data directory. Enter the  
drive and directory names with Alphanumeric Keys, then press the Enter  
Key. Up to 66 characters can be specified as a directory name (including the  
drive name).  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: Exit to DOS  
Section 5-15  
The Insert, Backspace, and Delete Keys can be used to correct the charac-  
ters displayed.  
Example: Inputting C:\CLK\DATAas the data directory name  
5-15 Q: Exit to DOS  
Q: Exit to DOSis used to quit the Controller Link Support Software.  
Note If data link table, routing table, or PC ID data has been modified but has not yet  
been saved, a confirmation window will be displayed when you attempt to quit  
the Controller Link Support Software. If the Controller Link Support Software is  
quit without saving data in the memory, all the data will be cleared. To save the  
data, execute one of the following save functions before quitting the Controller  
Link Support Software.  
Data link tables: S: Save tableof L: Data Linkin Main Menu  
Routing table: S: Saveof R: Routing tablein Main Menu  
PC ID data: S: Save PC IDof W: Edit PC IDin Main Menu  
Error logs: S: Saveof E: Display Error login Main Menu  
Connection information: S: Saveof K: Connection Informationin Main Menu.  
Select Q: Exit to DOSfrom the Main Menu. If data link table, routing table, or  
PC ID data in the memory has been modified, a confirmation window will be dis-  
played.  
Press Yto quit the Controller Link Support Software without saving the data or  
press Nto cancel quitting, then press the Enter Key.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 6  
Troubleshooting  
This section describes troubleshooting methods for some of the problems that can occur with the Controller Link Support  
Software.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Section 6  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Action to be taken  
The Controller Link Support Software  
is connected to a CV-series PC and  
No unit 0202is displayed.  
The CV-series CPU Unit was  
manufactured before April 1996.  
Set routing tables and set the network  
address to the value set in the routing  
tables (other than 0).  
A data link table is transferred to a  
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Unit  
and Comm err 1104is displayed.  
Word addresses between CI0 236 and Correct the data link table.  
CIO 299 (words that cannot be  
specified) are set in the data link table.  
The routing tables are transferred to a The Routing Table Enabled Bit in the  
Turn ON the Routing Table Enabled  
Bit in the DM parameter area  
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Unit  
DM Parameter Area for a  
and Cant run 2608is displayed.  
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Unit is (enabled).  
set to OFF (disabled).  
Characters are printed abnormally.  
The correct printer model is not set.  
The printer settings are incorrect.  
Check whether the printer model in  
the System Setup is correct.  
Check the printer settings.  
Printing is not possible from Windows The property settings of the Controller Open the Controller Link Support  
95.  
Link Support Software are incorrect.  
Software properties window and  
check the Print Screen check box in in  
the windows shortcut keys under  
Othersto see if it is selected.  
The Controller Link Support Software  
is being operated under Windows 95  
and communications errors such as  
Wrong networkare displayed.  
Other applications are running in the  
background under Windows 95.  
Close other applications running  
under Windows 95.  
See Appendix D Running Under  
Windows 95 for details.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Error Messages  
Error message  
Cause  
Action to be taken  
1st page  
The displayed screen is the first screen. There are no more screens before this  
screen.  
A required file could not be  
found. Please reinstall.  
The required file has not been installed  
or damaged.  
Reinstall the file.  
Address range err  
The specified bit or word address is  
incorrect.  
Check the PC model and specify the  
correct address.  
Cannot join network  
The local node is not participating in the Check the node participation status of  
network.  
the network.  
Cant write  
The specified area is read-only.  
Check the specified area.  
Check the communications cables.  
Comm err  
Communications were not executed  
normally.  
DataLink active cant run  
DataLink internal setting  
DataLink stopped cant run  
DataLink table err cant run  
Drive device err  
Cannot be executed because the data  
links are active.  
After stopping the data link, execute  
again.  
The data links are set to automatic  
setting.  
Set the data link to optional setting.  
Cannot be executed because the data  
links are inactive.  
After starting the data link, execute  
again.  
Cannot be executed because the data  
link table has not been registered.  
Register the data link table.  
The specified drive does not exist.  
Check the drive name of the data disk,  
memory card, or hard disk.  
The floppy disk has not been formatted.  
Format the floppy disk before saving the  
file.  
Echoback comm err  
EEPROM error  
The network has communications  
problems.  
Check the network.  
Data in the EEPROM in the Controller  
Link Unit or Controller Link Support  
Board is damaged.  
Reset the data link tables, network  
parameters, and routing tables.  
Executing Cant run  
PC is in monitor or run mode.  
Change the PC mode to program mode.  
FAT is destroyed  
The floppy disk, memory card, or hard  
disk is corrupted.  
Replace the floppy disk, memory card, or  
hard disk.  
File access error  
File does not exist  
The floppy disk file cannot be read or  
written.  
Re-create the data to be read or written.  
The specified file does not exist on the  
specified data disk, memory card, or  
hard disk.  
Press the F8 (Files) Key to display the  
file name list, and check the file name.  
File error  
The floppy disk, memory card, or hard  
disk has an error.  
Use a new floppy disk, memory card, or  
hard disk after formatting them.  
Floppy not loaded  
No floppy disk, memory card, or hard  
disk exists in the specified drive.  
Insert a floppy disk or memory card in  
the specified drive or check the specified  
drive name.  
Insuff disk capacity  
Invalid table  
The data disk, memory card, or hard disk Prepare another floppy disk or memory  
capacity is insufficient.  
card.  
The data link table has not been set  
correctly.  
Set the data link table correctly.  
Last page  
The displayed screen is the last page.  
There are no more screens after this  
page.  
Network does not exist  
The specified network does not exist.  
Check the specified network address  
and specify the correct network address.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
Appendix A  
Error message  
Cause  
Action to be taken  
No CLK board/driver  
A Controller Link Support Board is not  
installed in the computer or the driver is  
not set correctly.  
Install a Controller Link Support Board or  
set the driver correctly, then start again.  
No DataLink table cant run  
Cannot be executed because the data  
link table has not been registered.  
Register the data link table.  
No drive  
No floppy disk, memory card, or hard  
disk exists in the specified drive.  
Insert a floppy disk or memory card into  
the specified drive or check the specified  
drive name.  
No part of DataLink  
The specified node is not participating in Check all nodes that are participating in  
the data links.  
the data links.  
No polling node cant run  
Cannot be executed because the  
specified node is not a polling node.  
Check the node on the network.  
No print data  
No space  
The specified data cannot be processed. Specify the correct data.  
The file cannot be saved because of  
insufficient free space on the data disk,  
memory card, or hard disk.  
Delete unnecessary files from the data  
disk, memory card, or hard disk or use a  
new data disk or memory card.  
No such data  
The specified search data does not exist. Enter the correct search data.  
No such PC ID  
The specified PC ID does not exist.  
Check the specified PC ID and specify  
the correct PC ID.  
Check the specified PC ID and the PC ID  
registered in the computer.  
No unit  
The specified unit does not exist.  
Check the I/O configuration and the  
network configuration.  
No write area cant write  
Not in DataLink cant monitor  
The write area (transmission area) for  
the local node does not exist.  
Check the data link tables set for the  
local node.  
The data link table has not been set or  
the local node is not participating in the  
data links.  
Check the data link table set for the local  
node.  
Not in DataLink cant write  
The data link table has not been set or  
the local node is not participating in the  
data links.  
Check the data link table set for the local  
node.  
Not in network  
Not initialized  
The specified node is not participating in Check all nodes on the network.  
the network.  
The floppy disk or memory card has not Format the floppy disk or memory card  
been formatted. Files cannot be saved  
on unformatted floppy disks or memory  
cards.  
before saving the files.  
Out of range  
The specified word address is above the Specify a word address within the  
maximum limit.  
allowable range.  
Parameter err  
Printer err  
The specified parameter is incorrect.  
Specify the correct parameter.  
The Controller Link Support Software is  
not correctly connected to the printer.  
Press the Escape Key first, then check  
whether the cable between the Controller  
Link Support Software and the printer is  
correctly connected.  
The printer is not in ready status.  
Check whether the printer is in ready  
status.  
The printer or printer cable is faulty.  
A receive timeout error has occurred.  
Check the printer and printer cable.  
Receive time-out  
Increase the maximum node response  
time and then execute again.  
Relay err Netwk(???) Node (???) An error has occurred in the PC for  
relaying between networks.  
Check the PC for relaying between  
networks.  
Response time out  
A timeout error has occurred because a Check the destination unit.  
response to the communications  
command was not received from the  
destination unit.  
Routing table error  
The routing tables are set incorrectly.  
Check the routing tables.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
Appendix A  
Error message  
Cause  
Action to be taken  
Send time-out  
A transmission wait timeout error has  
occurred.  
Increase the maximum node response  
time and execute again.  
That name exists  
The same file name exists on the data  
disk, memory card, or hard disk. English on another data disk, memory card, or  
Specify another file name or save the file  
characters are not case-sensitive (for  
example, LAN and lan are recognized as  
the same name).  
hard disk (directory).  
Unable to start due to insufficient The amount of free memory space is  
Check the amount of free memory space  
and review the values set in FILES and  
other parameters in CONFIG.SYS.  
memory capacity. Processing  
stopped. Press any key.  
insufficient.  
Write protected  
The data disk is write-protected (the hole Always use the data disk in  
in the corner of the disk is uncovered).  
The specified drive name is incorrect.  
The specified file name is incorrect.  
write-enabled state (with the hole  
covered).  
Wrong drive  
Check the drive name of the data disk,  
memory card, or hard disk.  
Wrong file name  
Check the file name including the  
extension, then specify the correct file  
name.  
Wrong key  
The entered data is wrong.  
An invalid key was pressed.  
Enter the correct data.  
Press the correct key.  
Wrong netwk number  
Wrong network type  
The number of networks specified in the Specify the correct number of networks.  
routing table is incorrect.  
The specified network is not Controller  
Link.  
The specified network is not Controller  
Link.  
If the Controller Link Support Software is If the Controller Link Support Software is  
running under Windows 95, there are too running under Windows 95, there are too  
many active applications running in the  
background.  
many active applications in background  
mode.  
Wrong path  
The specified path name is incorrect.  
Check the path name of the data disk,  
memory card, or hard disk.  
The data drive name specified in Data  
dsk drvof the System Setup is  
incorrect.  
Wrong position  
Wrong setting  
The cursor is in the wrong position.  
The entered data is incorrect.  
Move the cursor to the correct position.  
Enter the correct data.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Using Modems  
This section describes how to use modems to connect the Controller Link Support Software to a remote PC via  
telephone lines.  
Outline  
This section describes restrictions on communication methods, modem conditions, system configurations, and  
setup procedures.  
Conditions for Online Connection via Modems  
Online connection via modems is possible only when the following PCs and communications methods are used.  
Restrictions on Methods of Communications with PCs  
The following are the PCs and communications methods that can be used for online connection via modems.  
Connection to the built-in Host Link port on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), CV-series, CS1-series, or CQM1H PC.  
Connection to the peripheral port on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) or CS1-series PC.  
Connection to a Host Link Unit (CV500-LK201) installed in a CVM1 or CV-series PC.  
Connection in Host Link mode to a Serial Communications Board (CS1W-SCB21/41) or Serial Communications  
Unit (CS1W-SCU21) installed in a CS1-series PC.  
Modem Conditions  
The modems in which the following items can be specified are required to allow online connection.  
Item  
Setting details  
Baud rate  
Data bit length  
Parity  
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps  
7 bits  
Even  
1 bit  
Stop bits  
Data error correction and data  
compression  
Data error correction enabled and data  
compression disabled.  
MNP class 4, or V.42, etc.  
Flow control  
Disabled (CS/RS control disabled and Xon/Xoff  
control disabled)  
Automatic reception  
ER signal  
Enabled (at PC)  
Always ON  
Fixed terminal line speed mode  
Abort timer  
Disabled  
Set to 10 minutes (example value)  
System Configuration  
Online connection via modems allows the Controller Link Support Software to connect to PCs on the Controller  
Link Network as shown below.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Connecting to a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) PC  
Controller Link Network  
Connecting to a CVM1 or CV-series PC  
or Host Link Unit  
Controller Link Network  
Connecting to a CS1-series PC  
Telephone line  
Modem  
Modem  
Computer  
CS1-series PC  
Built-in Host Link port  
or Serial Communica-  
tions Board/Unit  
Controller Link Network  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Connecting to a CQM1H PC  
Telephone line  
Modem  
Modem  
Computer  
CQM1-series PC  
Built-in Host Link port  
Controller Link Network  
Setup Procedures  
The following are the setup procedures for online connection via modems.  
1. PC Settings (PC Setup and so on)  
When connecting to the built-in Host Link port on a C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) PC  
When connecting to the built-in Host Link port on a CVM1 or CV-series PC  
When connecting to the Host Link Unit installed in a CVM1 or CV-series PC  
When connecting to the built-in Host Link port on a CS1-series PC  
When connecting to the Serial Communications Board/Unit installed in a CS1-series PC  
When connecting to the built-in Host Link port on a CQM1H PC  
2. Setting Up Modems  
3. Preparing and Connecting Cables  
4. Operation  
Dialing from the communications software  
Setting up the Controller Link Support Software (System Setup)  
Connecting online to the Controller Link Support Software  
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) PC Setup for Built-in Host Link Port  
This section describes how to set the DIP switch on the PC and set up the Host Link port (RS-232C port) using the  
PC Setup.  
DIP Switch  
Turn the CPU Unit OFF and set the DIP switch on the front panel as follows:  
Pin No. Setting  
Setting details  
1
2
3
Write processing executed from the peripheral device to the  
user program memory area and DM 6144 to DM 6655  
Automatic transfer of the contents of the memory cassette to  
the PC when power is turned on  
Switching the Programming Console messages between  
Japanese and English  
4
5
6
Default settings of expansion instructions  
Default settings for RS-232C port  
AR0712 control  
OFF  
For online connection via modems, always set pin 5 of the DIP switch to OFF (RS-232C port is not used with de-  
fault setting). Set other pins according to your needs.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
PC Setup  
Set up the RS-232C port on the PC using RS-232C Port Setup in the PC Setup from a Programming Device for the  
PC. Set the RS-232C port as follows:  
Example: Setting the baud rate to 9,600 bps  
Set a unit number between 0 and 31. Other items must be set exactly as shown above.  
CVM1 and CV-series PC Setup for Built-in Host Link Port  
This section describes how to set the communications path selector switch and the DIP switch for CVM1 and CV-  
series PCs and set up the Host Link port (RS-232C port) in the PC Setup.  
Always turn the PC OFF before setting the communications path selector switch and the DIP switch.  
Communications Path Selector Switch  
Set the communications path selector switch on the front panel of the PC to RS-232C.  
DIP Switch  
Open the cover of the Memory Card storage section on the front panel of the PC and set the DIP switch as follows:  
Pin No. Setting  
Setting details  
1
2
Baud rate of peripheral bus connector  
Pin  
1
50 Kbps  
OFF  
19.2 Kbps 9600 bps 4800 bps  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
2
OFF  
OFF  
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
The value set for Host Link is used.  
The communications conditions for Host Link connector are  
set in the PC Setup.  
5
6
(Automatic transfer of programs and settings at power-up)  
No terminator  
OFF  
Set pins 1, 2, and 5 according to your needs. Other pins must be set exactly as shown above.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
PC Setup  
Set up the RS-232C port on the PC using the RS-232C Port Setup in PC Setup from a Programming Device for the  
PC. Set the RS-232C port as follows:  
Example: Setting the baud rate to 9,600 bps  
Set a unit number between 0 and 31. Other items must be set exactly as shown above.  
Note CV-series PCs cannot be set up using the SYSMAC Support Software. Use the CV Support Software or the  
Programming Console to set up CV-series PCs.  
Host Link Port Setup for Connection to a Host Link Unit  
Installed in a CVM1 or CV-series PC  
This section describes how to set up the Host Link port (RS-232C port) using the rotary switches and DIP switch on  
the Host Link Unit and the CPU Bus Unit Setup for the PC.  
Note Before starting this setup procedure, create an I/O table to make the Host Link Unit ready for operation.  
Rotary Switches on Host Link Unit  
Use the rotary switches (SW1 to SW4) on the front panel of the Host Link Unit to set the CPU Bus Unit number, and  
the unit number used in the Host Link system.  
Set each rotary switch within the following setting range.  
Rotary switch  
SW1  
Setting details  
Setting range  
00 to 15  
(decimal number)  
Second digit of CPU Bus Unit number  
First digit of CPU Bus Unit number  
SW2  
SW3  
00 to 31  
(decimal number)  
Second digit of the unit number of  
communications port 2  
SW4  
First digit of the unit number of  
communications port 2  
Specify a CPU Bus Unit number that is different from the numbers of other CPU Bus Units installed in the same PC  
(including those on Expansion CPU Racks).  
Specify a unit number that is different from the unit numbers of other Host Link Units within the same Host Link  
network. (The unit number of communications port 1 is fixed at 0.)  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
DIP Switch on Host Link Unit  
Open the cover on the front panel of the Host Link Unit and set the DIP switch as follows:  
Pin No. Setting  
Setting details  
1
OFF  
The communications conditions for the communications port  
are as specified in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup. (The  
default setting is not used.)  
2
3
ON  
ON  
CTS signal at communications port 1 is always set to ON (0 V  
fixed).  
CTS signal at communications port 2 is always set to ON (0 V  
fixed).  
4
5
OFF  
OFF  
Reserved for system use (must be always set to OFF)  
Normal operation (when this pin is set to ON, a loopback test  
will be conducted)  
6
Test port setting  
Set pin 6 of the DIP switch according to your needs. Other pins must be set exactly as shown above. Pins 2 and 3  
have only to be set for the ports used for modem connection.  
CPU Bus Unit System Setup in the PC  
This section describes how to set up the Host Link ports using the CPU Bus Unit System Setup under the Commu-  
nications and CPU Bus Unit System Setup from a Programming Device for the PC.  
Note In the CPU Bus Unit System Setup screen for the Host Link Unit, +0to +9are used to set up communica-  
tions port 1 and +10to +19are used to set up communications port 2.  
Set each value on the screen as shown below.  
[CPU SIOU Unit System Setup]  
Unit # 00 LK  
BYTE b7  
b0  
0000]  
0000]  
0011]  
0001]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
HEX  
90  
00  
13  
11  
BYTE b7  
b0  
0000]  
0000]  
0011]  
0001]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
0000]  
HEX  
90  
00  
13  
11  
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
[1001  
[0000  
[0001  
[0001  
[0000  
[0000  
[0000  
[0000  
[0000  
[0000  
+ 10 [1001  
+ 11  
[0000  
+ 12 [0001  
+ 13 [0001  
+ 14 [0000  
+ 15 [0000  
+ 16 [0000  
+ 17 [0000  
+ 18 [0000  
+ 19 [0000  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
You need to set only the port to be used for online connection via modems.  
CS1-series PC Setup for Built-in Host Link Port  
This section describes how to set the DIP switch on the PC and set up the Host Link port (RS-232C port) using the  
PC Setup.  
DIP Switch  
Turn the CPU Unit OFF and set the DIP switch on the front panel as follows:  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Pin No.  
Setting  
Setting details  
1
2
ON: Writing disabled for user program memory.  
OFF: Writing enabled for user program memory.  
ON: The user program is automatically transferred and  
executed when power is turned ON.  
OFF: The user program is automatically transferred but  
not executed when power is turned ON.  
3
4
ON: Programming Console messages displayed in  
English.  
OFF: Programming Console messages displayed in the  
language stored in system ROM.  
ON: The peripheral port communications parameters set  
in the PC Setup is used.  
OFF: Peripheral port communications parameters set  
using Programming Console or CX-Programmer  
(Peripheral bus only) are used.  
5
6
OFF  
ON: RS-232C port communications parameters set using  
a CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus only) are used.  
OFF: The RS-232C port communications parameters set  
in the PC Setup is used.  
ON: User defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP Switch  
Pin Flag.  
OFF: User defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP Switch  
Pin Flag.  
7
8
Always OFF.  
Always OFF.  
For online connection via modems, always set pin 5 of the DIP switch to OFF (RS-232C port is not used with de-  
fault setting). Set other pins according to your needs.  
PC Setup  
Set up the RS-232C port on the PC using Host Link Port Setup in the PC Setup using CX-Programmer. Set the  
RS-232C port as follows:  
Example: Setting the baud rate to 9,600 bps  
Host Link port  
Mode setting  
Baud rate  
Data length  
Host Link  
9,600  
7
Bits/s  
Bits  
Stop bits  
Parity  
1
Bits  
Even  
Unit No.  
Transmission delay  
0
0
 10 ms  
Set a unit number between 0 and 31. Other items must be set exactly as shown above.  
Serial Communications Port Setup for Connection to a Serial  
Communications Board/Unit Installed in a CS1-series PC  
This section describes how to set up the serial communications ports for the Serial Communications Boards/Units  
using the software switch settings at the PC.  
Software Switch Settings  
In the software switch settings for the Serial Communications Board/Unit registered in the CX-Programmer I/O  
table, make the RS-232C settings for the serial communications port to be used for connection.  
Make the following settings:  
Example: Setting the baud rate to 9,600 bps  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Host Link port  
Mode setting  
Baud rate  
Data length  
Host Link  
9,600  
7
Bits/s  
Bits  
Stop bits  
Parity  
Unit No.  
1
Bits  
Even  
0
Transmission delay  
CS control  
0
 10 ms  
None  
Set a unit number between 0 and 31. Other items must be set exactly as shown above.  
CQM1H PC Setup for Built-in Host Link Port  
This section describes how to set the DIP switch on the PC and set up the Host Link port (RS-232C port) using the  
PC Setup.  
DIP Switch  
Turn the CPU Unit OFF and set the DIP switch on the front panel as follows:  
Pin No.  
Setting  
Setting Details  
1
2
ON: Writing disabled for user program memory.  
OFF: Writing enabled for user program memory.  
ON: The user program is automatically transferred and  
executed when power is turned ON.  
OFF: The user program is automatically transferred but  
not executed when power is turned ON.  
3
ON: Programming Console messages displayed in  
English.  
OFF: Programming Console messages displayed in the  
language stored in system ROM.  
4
5
ON: Expansion instructions set by user.  
OFF: Expansion instructions set to defaults.  
OFF  
ON: Peripheral port and RS-232C port communications  
settings determined by default settings.  
OFF: Peripheral port and RS-232C port communications  
settings determined by PC Setup.  
6
7
8
ON: User defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP Switch  
Pin Flag.  
OFF: User defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP Switch  
Pin Flag.  
ON: Programming Devices other than a Programming  
Console can be connected to the peripheral port.  
OFF: Only a Programming Console can be connected to  
the peripheral port.  
ON: Use CX-Protocol in protocol macro mode.  
For online connection via modems, always set pin 5 of the DIP switch to OFF (RS-232C port is not used with de-  
fault setting). Set other pins according to your needs.  
PC Setup  
Set up the RS-232C port on the PC using Host Link Port Setup in the PC Setup from CX-Programmer. Set the  
RS-232C port as follows:  
Example: Setting the baud rate to 9,600 bps  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
DM 6645  
0001 Hex  
Mode setting  
1:1 Link area  
CTS control setting  
Standard  
According to DM 6646  
settings  
communications  
conditions  
DM 6646  
0003 Hex  
Baud rate  
Data length  
Stop bits  
Parity  
9,600  
7
1
Even  
0
Bits/s  
Bits  
Bits  
Unit No.  
DM 6647  
0000 Hex  
Transmission delay  
0
 10 ms  
Set a unit number between 0 and 31. Other items must be set exactly as shown above.  
Modem Settings  
This section describes example modem settings. Perform an equivalent setup by referring to the users manual for  
your modem.  
Note 1. For the modem at the PC, always store the settings in the nonvolatile memory in the modem.  
2. In this section, the procedure for storing the settings in the nonvolatile memory in the modem is de-  
scribed. This procedure does not necessarily have to be performed for the modem at the computer. If,  
however, the settings are not stored in the nonvolatile memory, the modem will need to be set up using  
AT commands from the communications software each time a communications procedure is started.  
Setting Items  
The items shown in the following table must be always set.  
Other setting items differ according to the telephone line type, modem type, and so on.  
Set each item according to your system as described for specific modems.  
Item  
Setting details  
Baud rate  
Data bits  
Parity  
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps  
7 bits  
Even  
1 bit  
Stop bit  
Data error correction and data  
compression  
Data error correction enabled  
Data compression disabled  
MNP class 4, or V.42, etc.  
Flow control  
Disabled (CS/RS control disabled and Xon/Xoff  
control disabled)  
Automatic reception  
ER signal  
Enabled (at PC)  
Always ON  
Fixed terminal line speed mode  
Abort timer  
Disabled  
Set to 10 minutes (example value)  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Preparing and Connecting Cables  
The cable connector wiring method differs according to the communications port to be used. Prepare an appropri-  
ate cable for the system being used.  
Connecting the Modem to the Computer  
Using the cable provided with the modem, connect the modem to COM1 or COM2 of the personal computer.  
Connecting the Modem to the Host Link Port on the PC  
Prepare a cable for wiring the connectors as shown below.  
Modem  
At PC  
Abbreviation  
Abbreviation  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
hood  
Shield  
RS-232C  
interface  
RS-232C  
interface  
D-Sub 25-pin plug (male)  
D-Sub 9-pin plug (male)  
Connect to the built-in Host Link port on C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE), CVM1, CV-series, CS1-series, or CQM1H PCs, or  
connect to the Host Link port on a Serial Communications Board/Unit for CS1-series PCs.  
Connecting the Modem to the Peripheral Port on PC  
When the modem is to be connected to the peripheral port on the PC, connect a CQM1-CIF01 Peripheral Interface  
Cable to the PC as shown below and connect the other connector to the cable prepared to connect the modem.  
Cable to be prepared  
CQM1-CIF01  
To modem  
To PC  
Prepare a cable for wiring the connectors as shown below.  
Modem  
CQM1-CIF01  
Abbreviation  
Abbreviation  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
hood  
Shield  
RS-232C  
interface  
RS-232C  
interface  
D-Sub 25-pin plug (male)  
D-Sub 25-pin plug (male)  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Connecting the Modem to the Host Link Unit  
Prepare a cable for wiring the connectors as shown below.  
Modem  
Host Link Unit  
Abbreviation  
Abbreviation  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Connector  
hood  
Connector  
hood  
Shield  
RS-232C  
interface  
RS-232C  
interface  
D-Sub 25-pin plug (male)  
D-Sub 9-pin plug (male)  
Connecting the Cables  
Use the prepared cables to connect the computer to the modem and the modem to the PC.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Connecting Online via Modems  
This section describes how to connect online via modems. Be sure to set up and connect the modem before start-  
ing the following procedure.  
1. Start the communications software from the computer.  
2. Dial the other partys phone number from the communications software.  
From the communications software in terminal mode, enter the other partys phone number following ATDT”  
(underlined section).  
Example: Using tone dialing  
ATDT045-123-4567  
OK  
Wait until the modem connects to the modem at the PC.  
When the line is connected, CONNECTwill be displayed as shown below.  
CONNECT  
3. With the line connected, quit the communications software.  
4. Enter the following command (underlined section) to start the Controller Link Support Software.  
C:\CLK>CLKSS  
5. Set the following communications parameters using the System Setup of the Controller Link Support Software.  
Item  
Setting details  
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps  
1 bit  
Baud rate  
Stop bit  
Parity  
Even  
Data bits  
Unit No.  
7 bit  
Node number 0 (see note)  
C, CV, or CS1 (see note)  
Level 0 or 1 (see note)  
10 seconds (see note)  
Destination PC  
Operating level  
Maximum node response time  
(watchdog timer)  
Note Set these items according to the system being used.  
6. Operate the Controller Link Support Software as usual.  
Terminating the Online Connection  
When PC operations are completed, disconnect the line according to the following procedure.  
Press the PHONE button on the modem or turn the modem OFF to disconnect the line.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Modems  
Appendix B  
Connecting Online without Communications Software  
This section describes how to connect online via modems without using communications software.  
Registering RS-232C Interface Driver in CONFIG.SYS  
Use a text editor or word processing software to add the following line to CONFIG.SYS.  
DEVICE=A:\DOS\RSDRV.SYS  
Specify in the underlined section the drive and directory in which the RSDRV.SYS file resides. In this example, the  
file resides in directory DOS in drive A.  
Creating and Executing a Batch File  
Create a batch file for setting the computer communication conditions, modem, telephone number, and dial-up.  
A sample batch file for the ME2814B III is shown below. These files can be created using a text editor. In this exam-  
ple, the baud rate is 9,600 bps and the dialing method is tone dialing.  
@ECHO OFF  
MODE COM1:96,E,7,1  
ECHO ATY0X3&H0&K0&M4&N6S0=1S15=128S19=10&D0&W0DT045-123-4567 > AUX  
ECHO ON  
The underlined section indicates the other partys telephone number.  
For the meaning of each AT command, refer to Modem Settings earlier in this appendix.  
Execute the batch file at the DOS prompt to connect the line, then operate the Controller Link Support Software as  
usual.  
Note Before starting the Controller Link Support Software, always make sure that the line is connected.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
Registering the Controller Link Support  
Software in the SYSMAC Support Software  
If the Controller Link Support Software is to be used on the same personal computer as the SYSMAC Support  
Software, it is better to register the Controller Link Support Software in the SYSMAC Support Softwares Option  
Menu. This section describes how to register the Controller Link Support Software in the SYSMAC Support Soft-  
ware.  
1. Select the Option Menu in the SYSMAC Support Software.  
2. Select Z: Add new facilityfrom the Option Menu.  
The utility registration screen will appear.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering the Controller Link Support Software in the SYSMAC Support Software  
Appendix C  
3. Move the cursor to the letter where the utility is to be registered, then press the Enter Key.  
The following window will be displayed to prompt you to enter a utility name and an executable program name.  
The utility name  
Program  
Up to 30 characters can be entered as the utility name. Up to 120 characters can be entered as an executable  
program name.  
4. Enter a utility name in the first input area and an executable program name in the second input area, then press  
the Enter Key.  
The utility name  
Controller Link Support Software  
Program  
A: \CLK\CLKSS.BAT /OA:\SYSMATE  
After registration processing is completed, the window will return to the utility registration screen. If you go back  
to the Option Menu, you can confirm that the Controller Link Support Software has been registered.  
A:ControllerLinkSupportSoftware  
Note 1. Perform registration in the SYSMAC Support Software after installing Controller Link Support Software.  
2. When calling up Controller Link Support Software from the SYSMAC Support Software, the path must  
be set in the desired line of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, as shown below. Be sure to check this.  
PATH=%PATH%;C:\CLK  
The C:\CLKrefers to the directory in which the Controller Link Support Software is installed. If the directory in  
which the Controller Link Support Software is installed is not C:\CLK,make sure that the correct directory is spe-  
cified.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Running the Controller Link Support  
Software under Windows 95  
The Controller Link Support Software can be set up and run under Windows 95 only when it is to be used for the  
Controller Link Unit (for connecting to a PC).  
This section describes how to set up and start the Controller Link Support Software under Windows 95. It also  
presents some notes on running the Controller Link Support Software under Windows 95.  
Note 1. The Controller Link Support Software for the Controller Link Support Board (for running on a computer  
node of the network) cannot be run under Windows 95.  
2. The Controller Link Support Software cannot be run under Windows 3.1 or Windows NT.  
Setting Up the Controller Link Support Software  
Note Before starting the setup procedure, be sure to close all active programs.  
In the following descriptions, drive C and drive A are the hard disk drive and the floppy disk drive, respectively. If  
this system configuration is different from that of you computer, treat drive C and drive A as the hard disk drive and  
floppy disk drive in your computer.  
1. Start Windows 95.  
2. Insert the Controller Link Support Software floppy disk into drive A.  
3. Click on the start button on the lower left of the screen.  
4. Select Run from the Start menu.  
5. Enter A:\SETUP and then click on the OK button. The Controller Link Support Software setup procedure will  
start. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.  
6. When the setup procedure is completed, a message will appear on screen indicating that the setup has been  
completed.  
7. Click on the OK button.  
This completes the setup procedure.  
Starting the Controller Link Support Software  
Note Always run the Controller Link Support Software in full-screen mode. It cannot be run in window mode. Also,  
avoid switching to another programs while the Controller Link Support Software is running.  
Starting the Controller Link Support Software from Windows 95  
1. Click on the start button. The start menu will appear. Then, move the mouse cursor to Program.  
2. When the mouse cursor is positioned on Program, the next menu will immediately appear. Then, move the  
mouse cursor to SYSMAC.  
3. The Controller Link Support Software menu item will appear. Then, click on the menu item.  
The Controller Link Support Software will be started.  
Starting the Controller Link Support Software in DOS Mode  
1. Invoke DOS mode from Windows 95 as follows:  
Click on the Start button, select Exit Windows, select Reboot in DOS Mode, then click on the Yes button.  
The system will enter DOS mode.  
2. While in DOS mode, switch to the directory in which the Controller Link Support Software was installed, then  
enter CLKSS and press the Enter Key. The Controller Link Support Software will be started.  
Example: Controller Link Support Software in directory CLK in drive C  
C:\>CD \CLK  
C:\CLK>CLKSS  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Running the Controller Link Support Software under Windows 95  
Appendix D  
Precautions  
If Windows 95 automatically writes data on the hard disk in the background or other applications are running under  
Windows 95 during communications with a PC, communications errors (such as Wrong network type) may oc-  
cur. In particular, when a Host Link port is used, communications errors are more likely to occur depending on the  
communications protocol being used.  
If such communications errors occur, the frequency of error occurrence can be reduced by changing the perfor-  
mance or reception buffer performance for communications port settings on the Control Panel.  
Setting Delayed Writing for Drives  
Set delayed writing for drives under the file system settings for system performance on the Control Panel.  
Setting the Reception Buffer for the Communications Port  
Reduce the current reception buffer size under the communications port settings for the device manager for sys-  
tem settings on the Control Panel.  
If communications errors recur even after the above settings have been changed, close other applications running  
under Windows 95.  
Note 1. If the same problem occurs even after the settings have been changed, run the Controller Link Support  
Software in DOS mode.  
2. For computers with Windows Keys, never press a Windows Key during online connection with a PC.  
Otherwise, the line may be disconnected or Windows 95 may hang up.  
3. Never switch to another application by pressing the Escape or Tab Key while holding down the Alt Key.  
Otherwise, the line may be disconnected or Windows 95 may hang up.  
4. If an echoback test is to be executed, always execute it in DOS mode. Otherwise, the correct test results  
may not be obtained.  
Computers with Infrared Port Communications  
In the Controller Link Support Software, the serial port must be enabled.  
If you are using an infrared port, disable it or set the serial and infrared ports so that they do not overlap.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
Editing the Device Information Setting File  
Controller Link Support Software Version 1.0j does not display the latest PC models in the model list when I: De-  
vice Info setis selected from the Data Link Menu. In this situation, these new PC models can be registered in the  
Controller Link Support Software by editing the device information setting file (CLKTYPE.TXT) with a text editor.  
This Appendix describes the contents of the device information setting file and the procedure for registering the  
latest PC models in the file.  
About Device Information Setting File  
The device information setting file (CLKTYPE.TXT) contains the following information for each PC model.  
Maximum number of data link words per node  
Maximum number of words in the CIO relay area  
Maximum number of words in the link relay (LR) area  
Maximum number of words in the data memory (DM) area  
Maximum number of words in the extended data memory (EM) area  
Maximum number of banks in the extended data memory (EM) area  
The Controller Link Support Software checks the data link tables and data consistency according to the contents of  
the device information setting file.  
Note The device information setting file (CLKTYPE.TXT) resides in the directory in which the Controller Link Sup-  
port Software was installed.  
Editing the Device Information Setting File  
A new PC can also be temporarily registered by setting Othersin I: Device Info setin the Data Link Menu. In this  
case, however, the maximum number of banks and words that can be handled by the Controller Link Support Soft-  
ware will be registered, and so it will not be possible to perform checks based on the actual PC model. In order to  
check data link tables for PCs that are added with the Controller Link Support Software, it is necessary to edit the  
device information setting file in the way shown below.  
Note The device information setting file (CLKTYPE.TXT) is a text file and can be edited using any text editor.  
Contents of Device Information Setting File  
The contents of the Controller Link Support Softwares device information setting file (CLKTYPE.TXT) are as  
shown below.  
1:C200HE(-Z)=8000,512,64,6000,0,0  
2:C200HG(-Z)=8000,512,64,6000,6144,1  
3:C200HX=8000,512,64,6000,6144,3  
4:C200HX85Z=8000,512,64,6000,6144,16  
5:CVM1CPU21=8000,2556,200,24576,32766,8  
6:CVM1CPU11=8000,2556,200,24576,0,0  
7:CVM1CPU01=8000,2556,200,8192,0,0  
8:CV2000=8000,2556,200,24576,32766,8  
9:CV1000=8000,2556,200,24576,32766,8  
10:CV500=8000,2556,200,8192,0,0  
11:CLK Board=32000,65535,65535,65535,65535,16  
12:Others=32000,65535,65535,65535,65535,16  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the Device Information Setting File  
Appendix E  
The meaning of each line component is as follows:  
3: C200HX = 8000, 512, 64, 6000, 6144, 3  
Maximum number of banks  
Maximum number of words in EM  
Maximum number of words in DM  
Maximum number of words in LR  
Maximum number of words in CIO  
Maximum number of data link words per node  
Controller Link Support Board: 32,000 words max.  
CS1-series Controller Link Unit: 12,000 words max.  
Others:  
8,000 words max.  
Model name (character string displayed in the model list  
displayed by Device Info set)  
Model number (sequence in which each model appears  
in the model list displayed by Device Info set)  
When editing the device information setting file, note the following restrictions.  
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be specified as a model name. Model names are case-sensitive. For all  
other items, specify decimal numbers.  
Always place a colon (:) after each model number.  
Always place a equal sign (=) after each model name.  
Separate each item following the maximum number of data link words per nodeitem with a comma. No items  
can be omitted.  
Note 1. Before editing the device information setting file (CLKTYPE.TXT), save it as a different name to create a  
backup file.  
2. Before adding or changing items, carefully check the areas in the PC to be used. If incorrect values are  
specified, an error may occur during a data link table check even if the data link tables are correct.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F  
Data Link Setting Forms  
The forms on the next two pages can be copied and used to design data links. They are described in more detail in  
the body of this manual.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date  
___/___/___  
Comments:  
Controller Link Support Software  
Data Link Setting Form 1  
System  
Drawing No.  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Node  
Link start  
word  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date  
___/___/___  
Comments:  
Controller Link Support Software  
Data Link Setting Form 2  
System  
Drawing No.  
Node  
Node  
Area: 1 2  
Link start word  
Area: 1 2  
Link start word  
Send/  
Receive  
Start word at Source  
local node node  
Number  
of words  
Send/  
Receive  
Start word at Source  
local node node  
Number  
of words  
Data  
Offset  
Data  
Offset  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Send/  
Send/  
Receive  
Receive  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
data links  
automatically set, 39  
B-C  
manually set, 38  
starting, 38  
starting and stopping, 77  
baud rate, 26  
setting, 30  
device information setting file, 167, 168  
broadcast test, 38  
DIP switch, 151  
modem settings  
cables  
connection, 159  
preparing and connecting, 158  
CQM1H PCs, 156  
CS1-series PCs, 154  
CVM1 and CV-series PCs, 152  
CLKTYPE.TXT, 167  
DIP switch settings, CV-series Host Link Unit, 31  
communications  
range, 87  
setting standard parameters, 26, 29  
E
communications path selector switch, 152  
echoback test, 38  
computers  
compatible, 7  
requirements, 7  
EEPROM, Unit  
backing up, 113  
saving, 113  
writing, 114  
connection information  
clearing, 122  
error logs  
displaying menu, 119  
printing data, 123  
reading, 119  
reading data from a file, 122  
saving data as a file, 122  
displaying menu, 106  
file formats, 105  
printing data, 108  
reading, 106  
reading data from a file, 108  
saving data as a file, 108  
Connection Information Screen. See Network Configuration  
error messages, 63, 145  
local network table, 92  
relay network table, 92  
Screens  
CPU Bus Unit, system setup, 33, 154  
exiting, CLSS, 18  
D
F-L  
features, 2  
data directory, setting, 141  
file list  
displaying, 22  
screen, 22  
data link  
areas, 46  
creating, 56  
selecting a file, 22  
menu, displaying, 51  
setting forms, 49  
status, 48  
displaying, 78  
tables, 46  
checking, 61  
comparing, 71  
copying, 59  
creating and editing, 52  
deleting from nodes, 74  
edit screens, 46  
Function Keys, 54  
initializing, 60  
printing, 75  
reading from a file, 66  
reading from nodes, 67  
saving as a file, 64  
setting, 47, 51  
Frame Information Screen. See Network Configuration Screens  
Function Keys, 54  
functions, 3  
Host Link port (built-in)  
C200HX/HG/HE(-ZE) setup, 151  
CQM1H PC setup, 156  
CS1-series PC setup, 154  
CV-series PC setup, 152  
Host Link Unit  
connection to a CVseries PC, 153  
DIP switch, 154  
rotary switches, 153  
installation  
creating backup disk, 12  
preparation, 12  
procedure, 13  
keyboard, operation, 43  
logical error, 118  
transferring, 67  
writing to nodes, 69  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
M
O
offsets, 50  
main menu, 43  
online connection  
terminating, 160  
via modems, 160  
C: Monitor Network, 103  
D: Broadcast Test, 101  
E: Display Error Log, 104  
I: System Setup, 135  
operating procedures, 41  
K: Connection Information, 115  
L: Data Link, 45  
operation  
basic, 19  
overall flow, 9  
M: Maintenance, 112  
N: Echoback Test, 100  
P: Set Network Parameters, 83  
Q: Exit to DOS, 142  
P
R: Routing Table, 85  
S: Display Node Status, 109  
W: Edit PC ID, 124  
PC communications, 137  
Host Link, 139  
Peripheral Bus, 139  
settings, 138  
maintenance menu, displaying, 113  
PC ID, 38, 125  
changing, 128  
menu  
hierarchy, 10  
item selection, 20  
checking data, 132  
clearing multiple PC IDs, 131  
creating and editing, 127  
displaying edit screen, 126  
displaying the edit menu, 129  
printing data, 131  
modems, 149  
conditions, 149  
connection online, 160  
without communications software, 161  
connection to computer, 158  
connection to Host Link port, 158  
connection to Host Link Unit, 159  
connection to peripheral port, 158  
settings, 157  
setup procedures, 151  
system configuration, 149  
terminating online connection, 160  
reading, 127  
reading data from a file, 129  
saving data as a file, 129  
searching data, 134  
sorting data, 133  
specifying, 125  
specifying multiple nodes, 130  
using, 126  
writing, 127  
PC settings, 25  
host link, 27  
peripheral bus, 25  
precautions, general, xi  
N
printers, 8  
setting model, 141  
network  
connection, 5  
initializing parameters, 114  
starting, 38  
R
routing table, displaying the menu, 88  
routing tables  
checking, 91  
Network Configuration Screens, 116  
display order, 117  
comparing, 96  
creating and editing, 88  
deleting from a node, 98  
initializing, 93  
outline, 86  
printing, 99  
reading from a file, 94  
reading from a node, 95  
saving a a file, 93  
setting, 87  
transferring, 94  
writing to nodes, 96  
networks, interconnecting, 39  
node, connection method, 23  
node models, specifying, 81  
node number, setting, 30  
node response time, setting, 140  
non-participating nodes, 118  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
transmission frame format, setting, 30  
S-W  
troubleshooting, 143  
verify error, 118  
warnings, 64  
screen displays, 19  
screens, printing, 23  
Serial Communications Board/Unit, connection to a CS1series  
Windows 95, 165  
computers with infrared port communications, 166  
precautions, 166  
PC, 155  
starting, CLSS, 16  
startup, options, 17  
starting CLSS, 165  
word addresses, entering, 20  
CIO, LR, DM, 20  
EM, 21  
system setup, 38, 135  
displaying, 136  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revision History  
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.  
Cat. No. W369-E1-1  
Revision code  
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the  
previous version.  
Revision code  
Date  
Revised content  
1
March 2000  
Original production  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Microwave Oven M8260 1 User Manual
Mustang Survival Life Jacket MD2085 User Manual
National Instruments Computer Hardware 320174B 01 User Manual
NEC Projector j User Manual
NewAir Air Conditioner AC14000E User Manual
Nikon Digital Camera 13309 User Manual
Ocean Kayak Boat Scrambler 11 User Manual
Omega Automobile Parts FC 21 User Manual
Omnimount TV Mount CL S User Manual
Oregon Clock EB313HG User Manual